Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in info
      1 This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
      2 
      3 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      4 * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
      5 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      6 
      7    This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.20.
      8 
      9    Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
     10 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software
     11 Foundation, Inc.
     12 
     13    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
     14 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
     15 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
     16 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
     17 Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
     18 Free Documentation License".
     19 
     20 
     21 File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
     22 
     23 LD
     24 **
     25 
     26 This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.20.
     27 
     28    This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
     29 Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included
     30 in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
     31 
     32 * Menu:
     33 
     34 * Overview::                    Overview
     35 * Invocation::                  Invocation
     36 * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
     37 
     38 * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
     39 
     40 * BFD::                         BFD
     41 
     42 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
     43 * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
     44 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
     45 * LD Index::                       LD Index
     46 
     47 
     48 File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
     49 
     50 1 Overview
     51 **********
     52 
     53 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
     54 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
     55 a program is to run `ld'.
     56 
     57    `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
     58 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
     59 total control over the linking process.
     60 
     61    This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
     62 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
     63 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
     64 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
     65 of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
     66 
     67    Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
     68 linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
     69 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
     70 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
     71 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
     72 
     73 
     74 File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
     75 
     76 2 Invocation
     77 ************
     78 
     79 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
     80 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
     81 have many choices to control its behavior.
     82 
     83 * Menu:
     84 
     85 * Options::                     Command Line Options
     86 * Environment::                 Environment Variables
     87 
     88 
     89 File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
     90 
     91 2.1 Command Line Options
     92 ========================
     93 
     94    The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
     95 practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
     96 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
     97 standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
     98 `hello.o':
     99 
    100      ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
    101 
    102    This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
    103 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
    104 which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
    105 discussion of the `-l' option below.)
    106 
    107    Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
    108 point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
    109 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
    110 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
    111 other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
    112 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
    113 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
    114 option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
    115 noted in the descriptions below.
    116 
    117    Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
    118 linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
    119 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
    120 placed between an option and its argument.
    121 
    122    Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
    123 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
    124 script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
    125 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
    126 message `No input files'.
    127 
    128    If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
    129 assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
    130 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
    131 linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
    132 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
    133 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
    134 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
    135 way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
    136 placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
    137 default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
    138 command.  *Note Scripts::.
    139 
    140    For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
    141 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
    142 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
    143 requires them.
    144 
    145    For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
    146 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
    147 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
    148 rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
    149 only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
    150 `-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
    151 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
    152 
    153    Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
    154 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
    155 immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
    156 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
    157 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
    158 
    159    Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
    160 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
    161 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
    162 compiler driver) like this:
    163 
    164        gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
    165 
    166    This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
    167 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
    168 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
    169 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
    170 separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
    171 and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
    172 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
    173 
    174        gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
    175 
    176    Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
    177 GNU linker:
    178 
    179 `@FILE'
    180      Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
    181      inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
    182      exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
    183      literally, and not removed.
    184 
    185      Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
    186      character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
    187      option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
    188      (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
    189      to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
    190      additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
    191      recursively.
    192 
    193 `-a KEYWORD'
    194      This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
    195      argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
    196      `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
    197      and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
    198      `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
    199 
    200 `-A ARCHITECTURE'
    201 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
    202      In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
    203      Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
    204      ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
    205      the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
    206      archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
    207      i960, for details.
    208 
    209      Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
    210      other architecture families.
    211 
    212 `-b INPUT-FORMAT'
    213 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
    214      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    215      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
    216      option to specify the binary format for input object files that
    217      follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
    218      configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
    219      usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
    220      expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
    221      machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
    222      format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
    223      available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
    224 
    225      You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
    226      unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
    227      explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
    228      including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
    229      particular format.
    230 
    231      The default format is taken from the environment variable
    232      `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
    233      format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
    234      Commands::.
    235 
    236 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    237 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    238      For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
    239      files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
    240      described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
    241      MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
    242      linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
    243      language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
    244      directories specified by any `-L' options.
    245 
    246 `-d'
    247 `-dc'
    248 `-dp'
    249      These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
    250      for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
    251      symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
    252      `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
    253      effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    254 
    255 `-e ENTRY'
    256 `--entry=ENTRY'
    257      Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
    258      program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
    259      symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
    260      and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
    261      in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
    262      `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
    263      and other ways of specifying the entry point.
    264 
    265 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
    266      Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
    267      not be automatically exported.  The library names may be delimited
    268      by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
    269      symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
    270      option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
    271      linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
    272      explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
    273      this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
    274      option will be treated as hidden.
    275 
    276 `--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
    277      Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
    278      symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
    279      copied wholesale into the import library being generated during
    280      the link.  The module names may be delimited by commas or colons,
    281      and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the
    282      files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but
    283      for object files the name listed must include and match precisely
    284      any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
    285      command-line.  This option is available only for the i386 PE
    286      targeted port of the linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def
    287      file are still exported, regardless of this option.
    288 
    289 `-E'
    290 `--export-dynamic'
    291 `--no-export-dynamic'
    292      When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E'
    293      option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
    294      all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table
    295      is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at
    296      run time.
    297 
    298      If you do not use either of these options (or use the
    299      `--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
    300      dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols
    301      which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
    302 
    303      If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
    304      back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
    305      dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
    306      linking the program itself.
    307 
    308      You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
    309      be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
    310      it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
    311 
    312      Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE
    313      targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a
    314      DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below.
    315 
    316 `-EB'
    317      Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
    318 
    319 `-EL'
    320      Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
    321      format.
    322 
    323 `-f NAME'
    324 `--auxiliary=NAME'
    325      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
    326      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    327      the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
    328      auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
    329 
    330      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    331      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
    332      field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
    333      object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
    334      shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
    335      the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
    336      not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
    337      alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
    338      debugging or for machine specific performance.
    339 
    340      This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
    341      entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
    342      command line.
    343 
    344 `-F NAME'
    345 `--filter=NAME'
    346      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
    347      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    348      the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
    349      should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
    350      object NAME.
    351 
    352      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    353      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
    354      field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
    355      symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
    356      link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
    357      filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
    358      provided by the object NAME.
    359 
    360      Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
    361      toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
    362      output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
    363      this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
    364      `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
    365      environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
    366      when not creating an ELF shared object.
    367 
    368 `-fini=NAME'
    369      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    370      the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
    371      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
    372      as the function to call.
    373 
    374 `-g'
    375      Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
    376 
    377 `-G VALUE'
    378 `--gpsize=VALUE'
    379      Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
    380      register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
    381      such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
    382      into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
    383      formats.
    384 
    385 `-h NAME'
    386 `-soname=NAME'
    387      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
    388      field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
    389      shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
    390      executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
    391      shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
    392      using the file name given to the linker.
    393 
    394 `-i'
    395      Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
    396 
    397 `-init=NAME'
    398      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    399      the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
    400      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
    401      as the function to call.
    402 
    403 `-l NAMESPEC'
    404 `--library=NAMESPEC'
    405      Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
    406      of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
    407      If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
    408      library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search
    409      the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    410 
    411      On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
    412      files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
    413      systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
    414      `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    415      (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
    416      Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
    417      always specifies a file called FILENAME.
    418 
    419      The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
    420      it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
    421      symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
    422      the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
    423      appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
    424      symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
    425      cause the linker to search the archive again.
    426 
    427      See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
    428      archives multiple times.
    429 
    430      You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
    431 
    432      This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
    433      However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
    434      from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
    435 
    436 `-L SEARCHDIR'
    437 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
    438      Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
    439      archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
    440      option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
    441      order in which they are specified on the command line.
    442      Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
    443      default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
    444      regardless of the order in which the options appear.  `-L' options
    445      do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T'
    446      option is specified.
    447 
    448      If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
    449      "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
    450 
    451      The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
    452      `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
    453      cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
    454 
    455      The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
    456      `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
    457      at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
    458      line.
    459 
    460 `-m EMULATION'
    461      Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
    462      emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
    463 
    464      If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
    465      `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
    466 
    467      Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
    468      configured.
    469 
    470 `-M'
    471 `--print-map'
    472      Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
    473      information about the link, including the following:
    474 
    475         * Where object files are mapped into memory.
    476 
    477         * How common symbols are allocated.
    478 
    479         * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
    480           the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
    481 
    482         * The values assigned to symbols.
    483 
    484           Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
    485           which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
    486           symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
    487           This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
    488           only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
    489           circumstances the linker will display the final value
    490           enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
    491           script containing:
    492 
    493                   foo = 1
    494                   foo = foo * 4
    495                   foo = foo + 8
    496 
    497           will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
    498           option is used:
    499 
    500                   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
    501                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
    502                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
    503 
    504           See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
    505           expressions in linker scripts.
    506 
    507 `-n'
    508 `--nmagic'
    509      Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
    510      `NMAGIC' if possible.
    511 
    512 `-N'
    513 `--omagic'
    514      Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
    515      do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
    516      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    517      numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
    518      text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
    519      to the format specification published by Microsoft.
    520 
    521 `--no-omagic'
    522      This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
    523      sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
    524      to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
    525      against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
    526 
    527 `-o OUTPUT'
    528 `--output=OUTPUT'
    529      Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
    530      option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
    531      script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
    532 
    533 `-O LEVEL'
    534      If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
    535      output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
    536      probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
    537      moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
    538      Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
    539      Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
    540      for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
    541      change with future releases.
    542 
    543 `-q'
    544 `--emit-relocs'
    545      Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
    546      Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
    547      information in order to perform correct modifications of
    548      executables.  This results in larger executables.
    549 
    550      This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
    551 
    552 `--force-dynamic'
    553      Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
    554      specific to VxWorks targets.
    555 
    556 `-r'
    557 `--relocatable'
    558      Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
    559      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
    560      linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
    561      Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
    562      number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
    563      file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
    564      not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
    565 
    566      When an input file does not have the same format as the output
    567      file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
    568      not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
    569      further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
    570      not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
    571      all.
    572 
    573      This option does the same thing as `-i'.
    574 
    575 `-R FILENAME'
    576 `--just-symbols=FILENAME'
    577      Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
    578      relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
    579      file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
    580      in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
    581 
    582      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
    583      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
    584      treated as the `-rpath' option.
    585 
    586 `-s'
    587 `--strip-all'
    588      Omit all symbol information from the output file.
    589 
    590 `-S'
    591 `--strip-debug'
    592      Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
    593      output file.
    594 
    595 `-t'
    596 `--trace'
    597      Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
    598 
    599 `-T SCRIPTFILE'
    600 `--script=SCRIPTFILE'
    601      Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
    602      default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
    603      must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
    604      *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
    605      directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
    606      preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
    607 
    608 `-dT SCRIPTFILE'
    609 `--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
    610      Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
    611 
    612      This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
    613      processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
    614      command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
    615      the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
    616      behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
    617      linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
    618      (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
    619      such as `gcc').
    620 
    621 `-u SYMBOL'
    622 `--undefined=SYMBOL'
    623      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
    624      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
    625      modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
    626      different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
    627      This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
    628 
    629 `-Ur'
    630      For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
    631      `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
    632      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
    633      `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
    634      does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
    635      with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
    636      be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
    637      for the others.
    638 
    639 `--unique[=SECTION]'
    640      Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
    641      SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
    642      for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
    643      specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
    644      multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
    645      merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
    646      section assignments in a linker script.
    647 
    648 `-v'
    649 `--version'
    650 `-V'
    651      Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
    652      the supported emulations.
    653 
    654 `-x'
    655 `--discard-all'
    656      Delete all local symbols.
    657 
    658 `-X'
    659 `--discard-locals'
    660      Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
    661      system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
    662      systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
    663 
    664 `-y SYMBOL'
    665 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
    666      Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
    667      option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
    668      necessary to prepend an underscore.
    669 
    670      This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
    671      link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
    672 
    673 `-Y PATH'
    674      Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
    675      for Solaris compatibility.
    676 
    677 `-z KEYWORD'
    678      The recognized keywords are:
    679     `combreloc'
    680           Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
    681           dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
    682 
    683     `defs'
    684           Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
    685           symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
    686 
    687     `execstack'
    688           Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
    689 
    690     `initfirst'
    691           This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
    692           It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
    693           occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
    694           brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
    695           runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
    696           runtime finalization of any other objects.
    697 
    698     `interpose'
    699           Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
    700           symbols but the primary executable.
    701 
    702     `lazy'
    703           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    704           tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
    705           the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
    706           than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
    707 
    708     `loadfltr'
    709           Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
    710           runtime.
    711 
    712     `muldefs'
    713           Allows multiple definitions.
    714 
    715     `nocombreloc'
    716           Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
    717 
    718     `nocopyreloc'
    719           Disables production of copy relocs.
    720 
    721     `nodefaultlib'
    722           Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
    723           object will ignore any default library search paths.
    724 
    725     `nodelete'
    726           Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
    727 
    728     `nodlopen'
    729           Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
    730 
    731     `nodump'
    732           Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
    733 
    734     `noexecstack'
    735           Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
    736 
    737     `norelro'
    738           Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
    739           object.
    740 
    741     `now'
    742           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    743           tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
    744           program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
    745           using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
    746           to the point when the function is first called.
    747 
    748     `origin'
    749           Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
    750 
    751     `relro'
    752           Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
    753 
    754     `max-page-size=VALUE'
    755           Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
    756 
    757     `common-page-size=VALUE'
    758           Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
    759 
    760 
    761      Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
    762 
    763 `-( ARCHIVES -)'
    764 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
    765      The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
    766      either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
    767 
    768      The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
    769      undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
    770      searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
    771      command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
    772      undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
    773      appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
    774      resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
    775      searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
    776 
    777      Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
    778      to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
    779      between two or more archives.
    780 
    781 `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    782 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
    783      Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
    784      recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
    785      doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
    786      This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
    787      2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
    788      reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    789      option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
    790 
    791 `--as-needed'
    792 `--no-as-needed'
    793      This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
    794      mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
    795      Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
    796      library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
    797      library is actually needed.  `--as-needed' causes a DT_NEEDED tag
    798      to only be emitted for a library that satisfies a symbol reference
    799      from regular objects which is undefined at the point that the
    800      library was linked, or, if the library is not found in the
    801      DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, a
    802      reference from another dynamic library.  `--no-as-needed' restores
    803      the default behaviour.
    804 
    805 `--add-needed'
    806 `--no-add-needed'
    807      This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
    808      DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
    809      after the `--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
    810      a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
    811      `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
    812      those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
    813      default behaviour.
    814 
    815 `-assert KEYWORD'
    816      This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
    817 
    818 `-Bdynamic'
    819 `-dy'
    820 `-call_shared'
    821      Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    822      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
    823      is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
    824      of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
    825      may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
    826      library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
    827 
    828 `-Bgroup'
    829      Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
    830      section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
    831      object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
    832      `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
    833      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    834 
    835 `-Bstatic'
    836 `-dn'
    837 `-non_shared'
    838 `-static'
    839      Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    840      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
    841      variants of this option are for compatibility with various
    842      systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
    843      line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
    844      it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
    845      This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
    846      shared library is being created but that all of the library's
    847      external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
    848      static libraries.
    849 
    850 `-Bsymbolic'
    851      When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
    852      to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
    853      is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
    854      override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
    855      only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    856 
    857 `-Bsymbolic-functions'
    858      When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
    859      symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
    860      option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
    861      libraries.
    862 
    863 `--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
    864      Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
    865      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
    866      global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
    867      definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
    868      linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
    869      added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
    870      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    871 
    872      The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
    873      without scope and node name.  See *Note VERSION:: for more
    874      information.
    875 
    876 `--dynamic-list-data'
    877      Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
    878 
    879 `--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
    880      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
    881      It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
    882 
    883 `--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
    884      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
    885      identification.
    886 
    887 `--check-sections'
    888 `--no-check-sections'
    889      Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
    890      been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
    891      linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
    892      will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
    893      and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
    894      behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
    895      `--check-sections'.  Section overlap is not usually checked for
    896      relocatable links.  You can force checking in that case by using
    897      the `--check-sections' option.
    898 
    899 `--cref'
    900      Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
    901      generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
    902      Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
    903 
    904      The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
    905      easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
    906      printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
    907      names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
    908      is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
    909      references to the symbol.
    910 
    911 `--no-define-common'
    912      This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
    913      The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
    914      *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    915 
    916      The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
    917      assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
    918      file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
    919      assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
    920      allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
    921      be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
    922      the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
    923      prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
    924      duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
    925      search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
    926 
    927 `--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
    928      Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
    929      address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
    930      times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
    931      A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
    932      this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
    933      an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
    934      hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
    935      expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
    936      script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
    937      _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
    938      sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
    939 
    940 `--demangle[=STYLE]'
    941 `--no-demangle'
    942      These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
    943      messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
    944      it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
    945      leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
    946      and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
    947      Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
    948      demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
    949      demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
    950      default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
    951      set.  These options may be used to override the default.
    952 
    953 `-IFILE'
    954 `--dynamic-linker=FILE'
    955      Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
    956      generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
    957      linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
    958      you are doing.
    959 
    960 `--fatal-warnings'
    961 `--no-fatal-warnings'
    962      Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
    963      restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
    964 
    965 `--force-exe-suffix'
    966      Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
    967 
    968      If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
    969      `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
    970      output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
    971      option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
    972      Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
    973      an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
    974 
    975 `--gc-sections'
    976 `--no-gc-sections'
    977      Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
    978      on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
    979      (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
    980      specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
    981 
    982      `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
    983      symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
    984      and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
    985      will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
    986      dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
    987      linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
    988      this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
    989      recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
    990      relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
    991 
    992      This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
    993      option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
    994      explicitely specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
    995      option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
    996 
    997 `--print-gc-sections'
    998 `--no-print-gc-sections'
    999      List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
   1000      printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
   1001      collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
   1002      default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
   1003      can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
   1004      command line.
   1005 
   1006 `--help'
   1007      Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
   1008      and exit.
   1009 
   1010 `--target-help'
   1011      Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
   1012      output and exit.
   1013 
   1014 `-Map=MAPFILE'
   1015      Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
   1016      `-M' option, above.
   1017 
   1018 `--no-keep-memory'
   1019      `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
   1020      symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
   1021      instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
   1022      as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
   1023      space while linking a large executable.
   1024 
   1025 `--no-undefined'
   1026 `-z defs'
   1027      Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
   1028      This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
   1029      library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
   1030      behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
   1031      libraries being linked in.
   1032 
   1033 `--allow-multiple-definition'
   1034 `-z muldefs'
   1035      Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
   1036      report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
   1037      the first definition will be used.
   1038 
   1039 `--allow-shlib-undefined'
   1040 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
   1041      Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.  This
   1042      switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines
   1043      the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library
   1044      rather than a regular object file.  It does not affect how
   1045      undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
   1046 
   1047      The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
   1048      referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
   1049      create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being
   1050      used to create a shared library.
   1051 
   1052      The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
   1053      libraries specified at link time are that:
   1054 
   1055         * A shared library specified at link time may not be the same
   1056           as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol
   1057           might actually be resolvable at load time.
   1058 
   1059         * There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
   1060           undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
   1061 
   1062           The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
   1063           time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
   1064           current architecture.  This is used, for example, to
   1065           dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
   1066 
   1067 `--no-undefined-version'
   1068      Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
   1069      ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
   1070      and a fatal error will be issued instead.
   1071 
   1072 `--default-symver'
   1073      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1074      unversioned exported symbols.
   1075 
   1076 `--default-imported-symver'
   1077      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1078      unversioned imported symbols.
   1079 
   1080 `--no-warn-mismatch'
   1081      Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
   1082      files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
   1083      have been compiled for different processors or for different
   1084      endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
   1085      permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
   1086      care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
   1087      ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
   1088 
   1089 `--no-warn-search-mismatch'
   1090      Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
   1091      library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
   1092 
   1093 `--no-whole-archive'
   1094      Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
   1095      archive files.
   1096 
   1097 `--noinhibit-exec'
   1098      Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
   1099      Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
   1100      encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
   1101      writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
   1102 
   1103 `-nostdlib'
   1104      Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
   1105      command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
   1106      (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
   1107      ignored.
   1108 
   1109 `--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   1110      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
   1111      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
   1112      `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
   1113      object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
   1114      object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
   1115      should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
   1116      usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
   1117      name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
   1118      can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
   1119      script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
   1120      but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
   1121 
   1122 `-pie'
   1123 `--pic-executable'
   1124      Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
   1125      supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
   1126      similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
   1127      dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
   1128      (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
   1129      linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
   1130      executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
   1131 
   1132 `-qmagic'
   1133      This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
   1134 
   1135 `-Qy'
   1136      This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
   1137 
   1138 `--relax'
   1139      An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
   1140      supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
   1141      *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
   1142      Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
   1143      M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
   1144      PowerPC ELF32.
   1145 
   1146      On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
   1147      optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
   1148      addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
   1149      synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
   1150 
   1151      On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
   1152      symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
   1153      is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
   1154      family of processors.
   1155 
   1156      On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
   1157      but ignored.
   1158 
   1159 `--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
   1160      Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
   1161      all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
   1162      per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
   1163      as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
   1164      gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
   1165 
   1166      `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
   1167      symbols needed for relocations.
   1168 
   1169      You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
   1170      line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
   1171 
   1172 `-rpath=DIR'
   1173      Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
   1174      when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
   1175      arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
   1176      uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
   1177      option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
   1178      by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
   1179      description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
   1180      when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
   1181      variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
   1182 
   1183      The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
   1184      SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
   1185      `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
   1186      runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
   1187      options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
   1188      gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
   1189      systems.
   1190 
   1191      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
   1192      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
   1193      treated as the `-rpath' option.
   1194 
   1195 `-rpath-link=DIR'
   1196      When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
   1197      This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
   1198      as one of the input files.
   1199 
   1200      When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
   1201      non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
   1202      locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
   1203      it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
   1204      option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
   1205      `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
   1206      either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
   1207      appearing multiple times.
   1208 
   1209      This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
   1210      path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
   1211      such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
   1212      search path than the runtime linker would do.
   1213 
   1214      The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
   1215      shared libraries:
   1216        1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
   1217 
   1218        2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
   1219           between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
   1220           specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
   1221           and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
   1222           effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
   1223           only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
   1224           been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
   1225 
   1226        3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
   1227           `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
   1228           the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
   1229 
   1230        4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
   1231           directories specified using `-L' options.
   1232 
   1233        5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
   1234           environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
   1235 
   1236        6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
   1237           `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
   1238           libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
   1239           `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
   1240 
   1241        7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
   1242 
   1243        8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
   1244           `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
   1245           that file.
   1246 
   1247      If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
   1248      a warning and continue with the link.
   1249 
   1250 `-shared'
   1251 `-Bshareable'
   1252      Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
   1253      XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
   1254      automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
   1255      used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
   1256 
   1257 `--sort-common'
   1258 `--sort-common=ascending'
   1259 `--sort-common=descending'
   1260      This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
   1261      ascending or descending order when it places them in the
   1262      appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
   1263      sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
   1264      one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
   1265      constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
   1266      order is assumed.
   1267 
   1268 `--sort-section=name'
   1269      This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
   1270      patterns in the linker script.
   1271 
   1272 `--sort-section=alignment'
   1273      This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
   1274      patterns in the linker script.
   1275 
   1276 `--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
   1277      Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
   1278      each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
   1279      1 if not given.
   1280 
   1281 `--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
   1282      Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
   1283      single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
   1284      relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
   1285      files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
   1286      object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
   1287      relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
   1288      with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
   1289      The linker will not split up individual input sections for
   1290      redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
   1291      COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
   1292      relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
   1293 
   1294 `--stats'
   1295      Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
   1296      such as execution time and memory usage.
   1297 
   1298 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
   1299      Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
   1300      configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
   1301      that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
   1302 
   1303 `--traditional-format'
   1304      For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
   1305      the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
   1306      use the traditional format instead.
   1307 
   1308      For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
   1309      symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
   1310      with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
   1311      Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
   1312      program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
   1313      tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
   1314 
   1315 `--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
   1316      Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
   1317      by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
   1318      locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
   1319      single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
   1320      you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
   1321      values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
   1322      SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
   1323 
   1324 `-Tbss=ORG'
   1325 `-Tdata=ORG'
   1326 `-Ttext=ORG'
   1327      Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
   1328      SECTIONNAME.
   1329 
   1330 `-Ttext-segment=ORG'
   1331      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the
   1332      address of the first byte of the text segment.
   1333 
   1334 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
   1335      Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
   1336      possible values for `method':
   1337 
   1338     `ignore-all'
   1339           Do not report any unresolved symbols.
   1340 
   1341     `report-all'
   1342           Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
   1343 
   1344     `ignore-in-object-files'
   1345           Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
   1346           libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
   1347           files.
   1348 
   1349     `ignore-in-shared-libs'
   1350           Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
   1351           files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
   1352           This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
   1353           known that all the shared libraries that it should be
   1354           referencing are included on the linker's command line.
   1355 
   1356      The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
   1357      controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
   1358 
   1359      Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
   1360      reported unresolved symbol but the option
   1361      `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
   1362 
   1363 `--dll-verbose'
   1364 `--verbose'
   1365      Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
   1366      supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
   1367      Display the linker script being used by the linker.
   1368 
   1369 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
   1370      Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
   1371      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
   1372      additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
   1373      being created.  This option is only fully supported on ELF
   1374      platforms which support shared libraries; see *Note VERSION::.  It
   1375      is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version
   1376      scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
   1377      symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported.
   1378      *Note WIN32::.
   1379 
   1380 `--warn-common'
   1381      Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
   1382      or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
   1383      sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
   1384      not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
   1385      combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
   1386      this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
   1387      libraries as well as in your programs.
   1388 
   1389      There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
   1390      examples:
   1391 
   1392     `int i = 1;'
   1393           A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
   1394           the output file.
   1395 
   1396     `extern int i;'
   1397           An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
   1398           must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
   1399           variable somewhere.
   1400 
   1401     `int i;'
   1402           A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
   1403           symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
   1404           area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
   1405           symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
   1406           are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
   1407           linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
   1408           a definition of the same variable.
   1409 
   1410      The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
   1411      Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
   1412      symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
   1413      symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
   1414      symbols will be a common symbol.
   1415 
   1416        1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
   1417           already a definition for the symbol.
   1418                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1419                   overridden by definition
   1420                FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
   1421 
   1422        2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
   1423           definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
   1424           as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
   1425           in a different order.
   1426                FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
   1427                   overriding common
   1428                FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
   1429 
   1430        3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
   1431           symbol.
   1432                FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
   1433                   of `SYMBOL'
   1434                FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
   1435 
   1436        4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
   1437                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1438                   overridden by larger common
   1439                FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
   1440 
   1441        5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
   1442           symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
   1443           the symbols are encountered in a different order.
   1444                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1445                   overriding smaller common
   1446                FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
   1447 
   1448 `--warn-constructors'
   1449      Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
   1450      a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
   1451      linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
   1452 
   1453 `--warn-multiple-gp'
   1454      Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
   1455      file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
   1456      Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
   1457      in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
   1458      points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
   1459      loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
   1460      Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
   1461      relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
   1462      the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
   1463      to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
   1464      address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
   1465      be issued whenever this case occurs.
   1466 
   1467 `--warn-once'
   1468      Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
   1469      module which refers to it.
   1470 
   1471 `--warn-section-align'
   1472      Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
   1473      alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
   1474      section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
   1475      specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
   1476      start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
   1477 
   1478 `--warn-shared-textrel'
   1479      Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
   1480 
   1481 `--warn-alternate-em'
   1482      Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
   1483 
   1484 `--warn-unresolved-symbols'
   1485      If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
   1486      option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
   1487      This option makes it generate a warning instead.
   1488 
   1489 `--error-unresolved-symbols'
   1490      This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
   1491      when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
   1492 
   1493 `--whole-archive'
   1494      For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
   1495      `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
   1496      in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
   1497      object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
   1498      a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
   1499      resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
   1500 
   1501      Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
   1502      about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
   1503      Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
   1504      list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
   1505      your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
   1506 
   1507 `--wrap=SYMBOL'
   1508      Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
   1509      SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
   1510      reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
   1511 
   1512      This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
   1513      wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
   1514      to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
   1515 
   1516      Here is a trivial example:
   1517 
   1518           void *
   1519           __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
   1520           {
   1521             printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
   1522             return __real_malloc (c);
   1523           }
   1524 
   1525      If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
   1526      all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
   1527      instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
   1528      the real `malloc' function.
   1529 
   1530      You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
   1531      links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
   1532      you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
   1533      file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
   1534      call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
   1535 
   1536 `--eh-frame-hdr'
   1537      Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
   1538      `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
   1539 
   1540 `--enable-new-dtags'
   1541 `--disable-new-dtags'
   1542      This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
   1543      ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
   1544      `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
   1545      If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
   1546      created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
   1547      that those options are only available for ELF systems.
   1548 
   1549 `--hash-size=NUMBER'
   1550      Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
   1551      close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
   1552      time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
   1553      increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
   1554      this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
   1555      speed.
   1556 
   1557 `--hash-style=STYLE'
   1558      Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
   1559      `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
   1560      `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
   1561      new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
   1562 
   1563 `--reduce-memory-overheads'
   1564      This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
   1565      expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
   1566      O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
   1567      O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
   1568 
   1569      Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
   1570      to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
   1571      linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
   1572      switch has been used.
   1573 
   1574      The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
   1575      enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
   1576 
   1577 `--build-id'
   1578 `--build-id=STYLE'
   1579      Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
   1580      contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
   1581      STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
   1582      160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
   1583      `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
   1584      output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
   1585      specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
   1586      characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
   1587      `sha1' is used.
   1588 
   1589      The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
   1590      the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
   1591      nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
   1592      checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
   1593      later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
   1594      original linked file does not change.
   1595 
   1596      Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
   1597      `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
   1598 
   1599 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
   1600 -----------------------------------------
   1601 
   1602 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
   1603 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
   1604 executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
   1605 option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
   1606 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
   1607 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
   1608 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
   1609 
   1610    In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
   1611 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
   1612 PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
   1613 by either a space or an equals sign.
   1614 
   1615 `--add-stdcall-alias'
   1616      If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
   1617      as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
   1618      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1619 
   1620 `--base-file FILE'
   1621      Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
   1622      of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
   1623      [This is an i386 PE specific option]
   1624 
   1625 `--dll'
   1626      Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
   1627      `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
   1628      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1629 
   1630 `--enable-long-section-names'
   1631 `--disable-long-section-names'
   1632      The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that
   1633      permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
   1634      normal limit for Coff.  By default, these names are only allowed
   1635      in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry
   1636      the Coff string table required to support the longer names.  As a
   1637      GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable
   1638      images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)  disallow it in
   1639      object files, by using these two options.  Executable images
   1640      generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard,
   1641      carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing
   1642      output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file
   1643      viewers and dumpers.  However, GDB relies on the use of PE long
   1644      section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an
   1645      executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified
   1646      on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names,
   1647      overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it
   1648      finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
   1649      image and not stripping symbols.  [This option is valid for all PE
   1650      targeted ports of the linker]
   1651 
   1652 `--enable-stdcall-fixup'
   1653 `--disable-stdcall-fixup'
   1654      If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
   1655      to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
   1656      differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
   1657      and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
   1658      example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
   1659      function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
   1660      linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
   1661      prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
   1662      but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
   1663      need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
   1664      `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
   1665      warnings are not printed.  If you specify
   1666      `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
   1667      mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
   1668      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1669 
   1670 `--export-all-symbols'
   1671      If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
   1672      will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
   1673      there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
   1674      explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
   1675      function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
   1676      unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
   1677      `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
   1678      not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
   1679      DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
   1680      DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
   1681      ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
   1682      `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
   1683      whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
   1684      exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
   1685      list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
   1686      this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
   1687      cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1688      `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1689      `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
   1690      `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
   1691      `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1692      of the linker]
   1693 
   1694 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
   1695      Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
   1696      exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
   1697      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1698      linker]
   1699 
   1700 `--file-alignment'
   1701      Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
   1702      begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
   1703      defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
   1704      port of the linker]
   1705 
   1706 `--heap RESERVE'
   1707 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1708      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1709      commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
   1710      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1711      targeted port of the linker]
   1712 
   1713 `--image-base VALUE'
   1714      Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
   1715      lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
   1716      is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
   1717      of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
   1718      overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
   1719      and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1720      targeted port of the linker]
   1721 
   1722 `--kill-at'
   1723      If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
   1724      before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1725      targeted port of the linker]
   1726 
   1727 `--large-address-aware'
   1728      If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
   1729      the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
   1730      virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
   1731      in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
   1732      the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
   1733      this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
   1734      ports of the linker]
   1735 
   1736 `--major-image-version VALUE'
   1737      Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
   1738      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1739      linker]
   1740 
   1741 `--major-os-version VALUE'
   1742      Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
   1743      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1744 
   1745 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1746      Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
   1747      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1748      linker]
   1749 
   1750 `--minor-image-version VALUE'
   1751      Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
   1752      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1753      linker]
   1754 
   1755 `--minor-os-version VALUE'
   1756      Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
   1757      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1758 
   1759 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1760      Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
   1761      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1762      linker]
   1763 
   1764 `--output-def FILE'
   1765      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
   1766      corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
   1767      (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
   1768      library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
   1769      automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
   1770      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1771 
   1772 `--out-implib FILE'
   1773      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
   1774      lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
   1775      lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
   1776      clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
   1777      possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
   1778      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1779      linker]
   1780 
   1781 `--enable-auto-image-base'
   1782      Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
   1783      specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
   1784      generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
   1785      DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
   1786      execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1787      targeted port of the linker]
   1788 
   1789 `--disable-auto-image-base'
   1790      Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
   1791      user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
   1792      default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1793      the linker]
   1794 
   1795 `--dll-search-prefix STRING'
   1796      When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
   1797      search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
   1798      `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
   1799      between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
   1800      uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
   1801      `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
   1802      PE targeted port of the linker]
   1803 
   1804 `--enable-auto-import'
   1805      Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
   1806      imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
   1807      building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
   1808      of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
   1809      image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
   1810      PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
   1811 
   1812      Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
   1813      data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
   1814      placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
   1815      around a problem with consts that is described here:
   1816      http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
   1817 
   1818      Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
   1819      may see this message:
   1820 
   1821      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   1822      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   1823 
   1824      This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
   1825      ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
   1826      only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
   1827      to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
   1828      as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
   1829      DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
   1830      trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
   1831      data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
   1832      detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
   1833 
   1834      There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
   1835      the data type of the exported variable:
   1836 
   1837      One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
   1838      the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
   1839      environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
   1840      supports this feature.
   1841 
   1842      A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
   1843      variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
   1844      For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
   1845      array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
   1846      variable.  Thus:
   1847 
   1848           extern type extern_array[];
   1849           extern_array[1] -->
   1850              { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
   1851 
   1852      or
   1853 
   1854           extern type extern_array[];
   1855           extern_array[1] -->
   1856              { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
   1857 
   1858      For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
   1859      is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
   1860      variable:
   1861 
   1862           extern struct s extern_struct;
   1863           extern_struct.field -->
   1864              { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
   1865 
   1866      or
   1867 
   1868           extern long long extern_ll;
   1869           extern_ll -->
   1870             { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
   1871 
   1872      A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
   1873      'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
   1874      `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
   1875      compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
   1876      building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
   1877      building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
   1878      between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
   1879      constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
   1880      usage:
   1881 
   1882      Original:
   1883           --foo.h
   1884           extern int arr[];
   1885           --foo.c
   1886           #include "foo.h"
   1887           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1888             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1889           }
   1890 
   1891      Solution 1:
   1892           --foo.h
   1893           extern int arr[];
   1894           --foo.c
   1895           #include "foo.h"
   1896           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1897             /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
   1898             volatile int *parr = arr;
   1899             printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
   1900           }
   1901 
   1902      Solution 2:
   1903           --foo.h
   1904           /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
   1905           #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
   1906             !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
   1907           #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
   1908           #else
   1909           #define FOO_IMPORT
   1910           #endif
   1911           extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
   1912           --foo.c
   1913           #include "foo.h"
   1914           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1915             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1916           }
   1917 
   1918      A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
   1919      use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
   1920      offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
   1921      functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1922      of the linker]
   1923 
   1924 `--disable-auto-import'
   1925      Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
   1926      `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
   1927      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1928 
   1929 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1930      If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
   1931      section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
   1932      switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
   1933      can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
   1934      data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1935      targeted port of the linker]
   1936 
   1937 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1938      Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
   1939      from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
   1940      i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1941 
   1942 `--enable-extra-pe-debug'
   1943      Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
   1944      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1945      linker]
   1946 
   1947 `--section-alignment'
   1948      Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
   1949      at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
   1950      0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1951      the linker]
   1952 
   1953 `--stack RESERVE'
   1954 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1955      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1956      commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
   1957      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1958      targeted port of the linker]
   1959 
   1960 `--subsystem WHICH'
   1961 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
   1962 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
   1963      Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
   1964      legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
   1965      `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
   1966      also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
   1967      is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1968 
   1969      The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field
   1970      of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
   1971      ports of the linker]
   1972 
   1973 `--dynamicbase'
   1974      The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
   1975      randomization (ASLR).  This feature was introduced with MS Windows
   1976      Vista for i386 PE targets.
   1977 
   1978 `--forceinteg'
   1979      Code integrity checks are enforced.
   1980 
   1981 `--nxcompat'
   1982      The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.  This
   1983      feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
   1984 
   1985 `--no-isolation'
   1986      Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
   1987 
   1988 `--no-seh'
   1989      The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
   1990      image.
   1991 
   1992 `--no-bind'
   1993      Do not bind this image.
   1994 
   1995 `--wdmdriver'
   1996      The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
   1997 
   1998 `--tsaware'
   1999      The image is Terminal Server aware.
   2000 
   2001 
   2002 2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
   2003 ------------------------------------------------------------
   2004 
   2005 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
   2006 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
   2007 
   2008 `--no-trampoline'
   2009      This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
   2010      trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
   2011      using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
   2012      function is taken).
   2013 
   2014 `--bank-window NAME'
   2015      This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
   2016      in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
   2017      window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
   2018      to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
   2019 
   2020 
   2021 2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
   2022 ---------------------------------------------
   2023 
   2024 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
   2025 generation when linking for 68K targets.
   2026 
   2027 `--got=TYPE'
   2028      This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
   2029      TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
   2030      `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
   2031 
   2032 
   2033 
   2034 File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
   2035 
   2036 2.2 Environment Variables
   2037 =========================
   2038 
   2039 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
   2040 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
   2041 
   2042    `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
   2043 `-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
   2044 names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
   2045 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
   2046 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
   2047 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
   2048 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
   2049 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
   2050 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
   2051 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
   2052 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
   2053 
   2054    `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
   2055 `-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
   2056 behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
   2057 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
   2058 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
   2059 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
   2060 configured.
   2061 
   2062    Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
   2063 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
   2064 to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
   2065 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
   2066 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
   2067 
   2068 
   2069 File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
   2070 
   2071 3 Linker Scripts
   2072 ****************
   2073 
   2074 Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
   2075 in the linker command language.
   2076 
   2077    The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
   2078 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
   2079 to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
   2080 do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
   2081 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
   2082 commands described below.
   2083 
   2084    The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
   2085 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
   2086 linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
   2087 display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
   2088 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
   2089 
   2090    You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
   2091 option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
   2092 linker script.
   2093 
   2094    You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
   2095 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
   2096 Implicit Linker Scripts::.
   2097 
   2098 * Menu:
   2099 
   2100 * Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
   2101 * Script Format::		Linker Script Format
   2102 * Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
   2103 * Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
   2104 * Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
   2105 * SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
   2106 * MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
   2107 * PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
   2108 * VERSION::			VERSION Command
   2109 * Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
   2110 * Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
   2111 
   2112 
   2113 File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2114 
   2115 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
   2116 ================================
   2117 
   2118 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
   2119 describe the linker script language.
   2120 
   2121    The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
   2122 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
   2123 "object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
   2124 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
   2125 will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
   2126 things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
   2127 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
   2128 file is an "output section".
   2129 
   2130    Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
   2131 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
   2132 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
   2133 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
   2134 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
   2135 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
   2136 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
   2137 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
   2138 debugging information.
   2139 
   2140    Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
   2141 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
   2142 section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
   2143 "LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
   2144 section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
   2145 same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
   2146 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
   2147 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
   2148 based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
   2149 RAM address would be the VMA.
   2150 
   2151    You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
   2152 program with the `-h' option.
   2153 
   2154    Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
   2155 table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
   2156 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
   2157 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
   2158 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
   2159 variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
   2160 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
   2161 
   2162    You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
   2163 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
   2164 
   2165 
   2166 File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
   2167 
   2168 3.2 Linker Script Format
   2169 ========================
   2170 
   2171 Linker scripts are text files.
   2172 
   2173    You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
   2174 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
   2175 symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
   2176 generally ignored.
   2177 
   2178    Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
   2179 directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
   2180 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
   2181 in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
   2182 file name.
   2183 
   2184    You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
   2185 `/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
   2186 whitespace.
   2187 
   2188 
   2189 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2190 
   2191 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
   2192 ================================
   2193 
   2194 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
   2195 
   2196    The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
   2197 `SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
   2198 layout of the output file.
   2199 
   2200    The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
   2201 a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
   2202 initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
   2203 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
   2204 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
   2205 files.
   2206 
   2207    For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
   2208 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
   2209 linker script which will do that:
   2210      SECTIONS
   2211      {
   2212        . = 0x10000;
   2213        .text : { *(.text) }
   2214        . = 0x8000000;
   2215        .data : { *(.data) }
   2216        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2217      }
   2218 
   2219    You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
   2220 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
   2221 enclosed in curly braces.
   2222 
   2223    The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
   2224 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
   2225 counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
   2226 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
   2227 current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
   2228 incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
   2229 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
   2230 
   2231    The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
   2232 required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
   2233 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
   2234 which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
   2235 which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
   2236 `.text' input sections in all input files.
   2237 
   2238    Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
   2239 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
   2240 section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
   2241 
   2242    The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
   2243 output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
   2244 address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
   2245 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
   2246 size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
   2247 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
   2248 section in memory.
   2249 
   2250    The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
   2251 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
   2252 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
   2253 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
   2254 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
   2255 
   2256    That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
   2257 
   2258 
   2259 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
   2260 
   2261 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
   2262 =================================
   2263 
   2264 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
   2265 
   2266 * Menu:
   2267 
   2268 * Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
   2269 * File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
   2270 
   2271 * Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
   2272 
   2273 * REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
   2274 * Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
   2275 
   2276 
   2277 File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2278 
   2279 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
   2280 -----------------------------
   2281 
   2282 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
   2283 point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
   2284 point.  The argument is a symbol name:
   2285      ENTRY(SYMBOL)
   2286 
   2287    There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
   2288 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
   2289 stopping when one of them succeeds:
   2290    * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
   2291 
   2292    * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
   2293 
   2294    * the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
   2295 
   2296    * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
   2297 
   2298    * The address `0'.
   2299 
   2300 
   2301 File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
   2302 
   2303 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
   2304 ---------------------------------
   2305 
   2306 Several linker script commands deal with files.
   2307 
   2308 `INCLUDE FILENAME'
   2309      Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
   2310      be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
   2311      specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
   2312      up to 10 levels deep.
   2313 
   2314      You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
   2315      `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
   2316 
   2317 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2318 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
   2319      The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
   2320      in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
   2321 
   2322      For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
   2323      a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
   2324      line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
   2325 
   2326      In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
   2327      linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
   2328      option.
   2329 
   2330      In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
   2331      with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
   2332      inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
   2333      the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
   2334      file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
   2335      will search through the archive library search path.  See the
   2336      description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2337 
   2338      If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
   2339      `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
   2340 
   2341      When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
   2342      files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
   2343      script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
   2344 
   2345 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2346 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
   2347      The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
   2348      should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
   2349      new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
   2350      in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2351 
   2352 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2353 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
   2354      This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
   2355      commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
   2356      as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
   2357      with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
   2358      when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
   2359      `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
   2360      restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
   2361      afterwards.
   2362 
   2363 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
   2364      The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
   2365      `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
   2366      FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
   2367      Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
   2368      precedence.
   2369 
   2370      You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
   2371      output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
   2372 
   2373 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
   2374      The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
   2375      looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
   2376      like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
   2377      Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
   2378      both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
   2379      searched first.
   2380 
   2381 `STARTUP(FILENAME)'
   2382      The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
   2383      that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
   2384      though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
   2385      useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
   2386      start of the first file.
   2387 
   2388 
   2389 File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: REGION_ALIAS,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2390 
   2391 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
   2392 -----------------------------------------------
   2393 
   2394 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
   2395 
   2396 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
   2397 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
   2398      The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
   2399      output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
   2400      exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2401      Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
   2402      line option takes precedence.
   2403 
   2404      You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
   2405      formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
   2406      permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
   2407      desired endianness.
   2408 
   2409      If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
   2410      be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
   2411      format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
   2412      output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
   2413 
   2414      For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
   2415      uses this command:
   2416           OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
   2417      This says that the default format for the output file is
   2418      `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
   2419      option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
   2420      format.
   2421 
   2422 `TARGET(BFDNAME)'
   2423      The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
   2424      files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
   2425      command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2426      Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
   2427      but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
   2428      used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
   2429 
   2430 
   2431 File: ld.info,  Node: REGION_ALIAS,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2432 
   2433 3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
   2434 ------------------------------------------
   2435 
   2436 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
   2437 *Note MEMORY:: command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory
   2438 region.
   2439 
   2440      REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
   2441 
   2442    The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
   2443 memory region REGION.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
   2444 to memory regions.  An example follows.
   2445 
   2446    Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
   2447 various memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile
   2448 memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have
   2449 a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and
   2450 read-only data access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
   2451 memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
   2452 capability.  We have four output sections:
   2453 
   2454    * `.text' program code;
   2455 
   2456    * `.rodata' read-only data;
   2457 
   2458    * `.data' read-write initialized data;
   2459 
   2460    * `.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
   2461 
   2462    The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
   2463 independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
   2464 part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
   2465 system.  Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
   2466 `A', `B' and `C':
   2467 Section            Variant A          Variant B          Variant C
   2468 .text              RAM                ROM                ROM
   2469 .rodata            RAM                ROM                ROM2
   2470 .data              RAM                RAM/ROM            RAM/ROM2
   2471 .bss               RAM                RAM                RAM
   2472    The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
   2473 loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively.  Please note that the
   2474 load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the
   2475 end of the `.rodata' section.
   2476 
   2477    The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
   2478 It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes
   2479 the memory layout:
   2480      INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
   2481 
   2482      SECTIONS
   2483        {
   2484          .text :
   2485            {
   2486              *(.text)
   2487            } > REGION_TEXT
   2488          .rodata :
   2489            {
   2490              *(.rodata)
   2491              rodata_end = .;
   2492            } > REGION_RODATA
   2493          .data : AT (rodata_end)
   2494            {
   2495              data_start = .;
   2496              *(.data)
   2497            } > REGION_DATA
   2498          data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
   2499          data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
   2500          .bss :
   2501            {
   2502              *(.bss)
   2503            } > REGION_BSS
   2504        }
   2505 
   2506    Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
   2507 regions and alias names.  The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three
   2508 variants `A', `B' and `C':
   2509 `A'
   2510      Here everything goes into the `RAM'.
   2511           MEMORY
   2512             {
   2513               RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
   2514             }
   2515 
   2516           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
   2517           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
   2518           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
   2519           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
   2520 
   2521 `B'
   2522      Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'.  Read-write
   2523      data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the initialized data is
   2524      loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into
   2525      the `RAM'.
   2526           MEMORY
   2527             {
   2528               ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
   2529               RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
   2530             }
   2531 
   2532           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
   2533           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
   2534           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
   2535           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
   2536 
   2537 `C'
   2538      Program code goes into the `ROM'.  Read-only data goes into the
   2539      `ROM2'.  Read-write data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the
   2540      initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied
   2541      during system start into the `RAM'.
   2542           MEMORY
   2543             {
   2544               ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
   2545               ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
   2546               RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
   2547             }
   2548 
   2549           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
   2550           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
   2551           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
   2552           REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
   2553 
   2554    It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
   2555 copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if
   2556 necessary:
   2557      #include <string.h>
   2558 
   2559      extern char data_start [];
   2560      extern char data_size [];
   2561      extern char data_load_start [];
   2562 
   2563      void copy_data(void)
   2564      {
   2565        if (data_start != data_load_start)
   2566          {
   2567            memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
   2568          }
   2569      }
   2570 
   2571 
   2572 File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: REGION_ALIAS,  Up: Simple Commands
   2573 
   2574 3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
   2575 ----------------------------------
   2576 
   2577 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
   2578 
   2579 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
   2580      Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
   2581      with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
   2582 
   2583 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
   2584      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
   2585      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
   2586      modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
   2587      each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
   2588      command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
   2589 
   2590 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2591      This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
   2592      to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
   2593      output file is specified (`-r').
   2594 
   2595 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2596      This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
   2597      command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
   2598      to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
   2599 
   2600 `INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
   2601      This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
   2602      augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
   2603      inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
   2604      OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
   2605      linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
   2606      sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
   2607      the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
   2608      the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
   2609      linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
   2610      default linker script statements in the internal linker
   2611      representation of the script.  In particular, input section
   2612      assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
   2613      the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
   2614      `INSERT' might look:
   2615 
   2616           SECTIONS
   2617           {
   2618             OVERLAY :
   2619             {
   2620               .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
   2621               .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
   2622             }
   2623           }
   2624           INSERT AFTER .text;
   2625 
   2626 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
   2627      This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
   2628      references among certain output sections.
   2629 
   2630      In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
   2631      using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
   2632      section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
   2633      sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
   2634      code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
   2635 
   2636      The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
   2637      `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
   2638      an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
   2639      `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
   2640      names.
   2641 
   2642 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
   2643      Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
   2644      one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
   2645      see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
   2646      program with the `-f' option.
   2647 
   2648 
   2649 File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
   2650 
   2651 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
   2652 ===============================
   2653 
   2654 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
   2655 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
   2656 
   2657 * Menu:
   2658 
   2659 * Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
   2660 * PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
   2661 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2662 * Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
   2663 
   2664 
   2665 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2666 
   2667 3.5.1 Simple Assignments
   2668 ------------------------
   2669 
   2670 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
   2671 
   2672 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
   2673 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
   2674 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
   2675 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
   2676 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
   2677 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
   2678 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
   2679 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
   2680 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
   2681 
   2682    The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
   2683 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
   2684 adjusted accordingly.
   2685 
   2686    The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
   2687 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
   2688 
   2689    The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
   2690 
   2691    Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
   2692 
   2693    You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
   2694 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
   2695 section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
   2696 
   2697    The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
   2698 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
   2699 
   2700    Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
   2701 assignments may be used:
   2702 
   2703      floating_point = 0;
   2704      SECTIONS
   2705      {
   2706        .text :
   2707          {
   2708            *(.text)
   2709            _etext = .;
   2710          }
   2711        _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
   2712        .data : { *(.data) }
   2713      }
   2714    In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
   2715 zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
   2716 last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
   2717 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
   2718 boundary.
   2719 
   2720 
   2721 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
   2722 
   2723 3.5.2 PROVIDE
   2724 -------------
   2725 
   2726 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
   2727 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
   2728 the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
   2729 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
   2730 function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
   2731 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
   2732 but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
   2733 
   2734    Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
   2735      SECTIONS
   2736      {
   2737        .text :
   2738          {
   2739            *(.text)
   2740            _etext = .;
   2741            PROVIDE(etext = .);
   2742          }
   2743      }
   2744 
   2745    In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
   2746 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
   2747 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
   2748 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
   2749 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
   2750 will use the definition in the linker script.
   2751 
   2752 
   2753 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2754 
   2755 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2756 --------------------
   2757 
   2758 Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
   2759 hidden and won't be exported.
   2760 
   2761 
   2762 File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
   2763 
   2764 3.5.4 Source Code Reference
   2765 ---------------------------
   2766 
   2767 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
   2768 intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
   2769 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
   2770 that does not have a value.
   2771 
   2772    Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
   2773 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
   2774 stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
   2775 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
   2776 mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
   2777 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
   2778 variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
   2779 linker script variable might be referred to as:
   2780 
   2781        extern int foo;
   2782 
   2783    But in the linker script it might be defined as:
   2784 
   2785        _foo = 1000;
   2786 
   2787    In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
   2788 transformation has taken place.
   2789 
   2790    When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
   2791 things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
   2792 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
   2793 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
   2794 holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
   2795 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
   2796 following C declaration, at file scope:
   2797 
   2798        int foo = 1000;
   2799 
   2800    creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
   2801 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
   2802 initially stored.
   2803 
   2804    When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
   2805 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
   2806 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
   2807 So:
   2808 
   2809        foo = 1;
   2810 
   2811    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
   2812 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
   2813 address.  Whereas:
   2814 
   2815        int * a = & foo;
   2816 
   2817    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
   2818 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
   2819 variable `a'.
   2820 
   2821    Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
   2822 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
   2823 an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
   2824 definition:
   2825 
   2826        foo = 1000;
   2827 
   2828    creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
   2829 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
   2830 address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
   2831 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
   2832 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
   2833 
   2834    Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
   2835 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
   2836 attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
   2837 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
   2838 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
   2839 
   2840        start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
   2841        end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
   2842        start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
   2843 
   2844    Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
   2845 
   2846        extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
   2847 
   2848        memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
   2849 
   2850    Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
   2851 
   2852 
   2853 File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
   2854 
   2855 3.6 SECTIONS Command
   2856 ====================
   2857 
   2858 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
   2859 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
   2860 
   2861    The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
   2862      SECTIONS
   2863      {
   2864        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2865        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2866        ...
   2867      }
   2868 
   2869    Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
   2870 
   2871    * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   2872 
   2873    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2874 
   2875    * an output section description
   2876 
   2877    * an overlay description
   2878 
   2879    The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
   2880 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
   2881 those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
   2882 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
   2883 the layout of the output file.
   2884 
   2885    Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
   2886 below.
   2887 
   2888    If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
   2889 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
   2890 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
   2891 input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
   2892 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
   2893 in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
   2894 
   2895 * Menu:
   2896 
   2897 * Output Section Description::	Output section description
   2898 * Output Section Name::		Output section name
   2899 * Output Section Address::	Output section address
   2900 * Input Section::		Input section description
   2901 * Output Section Data::		Output section data
   2902 * Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
   2903 * Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
   2904 * Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
   2905 * Overlay Description::		Overlay description
   2906 
   2907 
   2908 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2909 
   2910 3.6.1 Output Section Description
   2911 --------------------------------
   2912 
   2913 The full description of an output section looks like this:
   2914      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2915        [AT(LMA)]
   2916        [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
   2917        [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2918        [CONSTRAINT]
   2919        {
   2920          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2921          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2922          ...
   2923        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2924 
   2925    Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
   2926 attributes.
   2927 
   2928    The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
   2929 is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
   2930 line breaks and other white space are optional.
   2931 
   2932    Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
   2933 
   2934    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2935 
   2936    * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   2937 
   2938    * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   2939 
   2940    * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
   2941 
   2942 
   2943 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
   2944 
   2945 3.6.2 Output Section Name
   2946 -------------------------
   2947 
   2948 The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
   2949 constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
   2950 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
   2951 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
   2952 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
   2953 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
   2954 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
   2955 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
   2956 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
   2957 
   2958    The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
   2959 Discarding::.
   2960 
   2961 
   2962 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2963 
   2964 3.6.3 Output Section Address
   2965 ----------------------------
   2966 
   2967 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
   2968 of the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
   2969 set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
   2970 value of the location counter.
   2971 
   2972    If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
   2973 set to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
   2974 the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
   2975 the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
   2976 output section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
   2977 strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
   2978 section.
   2979 
   2980    For example,
   2981      .text . : { *(.text) }
   2982    and
   2983      .text : { *(.text) }
   2984    are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
   2985 output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
   2986 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
   2987 to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
   2988 
   2989    The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
   2990 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
   2991 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
   2992 do something like this:
   2993      .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
   2994    This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
   2995 aligned upward to the specified value.
   2996 
   2997    Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
   2998 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
   2999 sections are ignored).
   3000 
   3001 
   3002 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
   3003 
   3004 3.6.4 Input Section Description
   3005 -------------------------------
   3006 
   3007 The most common output section command is an input section description.
   3008 
   3009    The input section description is the most basic linker script
   3010 operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
   3011 your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
   3012 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
   3013 
   3014 * Menu:
   3015 
   3016 * Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
   3017 * Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
   3018 * Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
   3019 * Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
   3020 * Input Section Example::	Input section example
   3021 
   3022 
   3023 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   3024 
   3025 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
   3026 ............................
   3027 
   3028 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
   3029 by a list of section names in parentheses.
   3030 
   3031    The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
   3032 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
   3033 
   3034    The most common input section description is to include all input
   3035 sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
   3036 include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
   3037      *(.text)
   3038    Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
   3039 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
   3040 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
   3041 EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
   3042      *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
   3043    will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
   3044 `otherfile.o' to be included.
   3045 
   3046    There are two ways to include more than one section:
   3047      *(.text .rdata)
   3048      *(.text) *(.rdata)
   3049    The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
   3050 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
   3051 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
   3052 they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
   3053 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
   3054 sections.
   3055 
   3056    You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
   3057 file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
   3058 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
   3059      data.o(.data)
   3060 
   3061    You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
   3062 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
   3063 no whitespace around the colon.
   3064 
   3065 `archive:file'
   3066      matches file within archive
   3067 
   3068 `archive:'
   3069      matches the whole archive
   3070 
   3071 `:file'
   3072      matches file but not one in an archive
   3073 
   3074    Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
   3075 wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
   3076 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
   3077 is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
   3078 `c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
   3079 `EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
   3080 contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
   3081 using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
   3082 
   3083    If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
   3084 in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
   3085 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
   3086      data.o
   3087 
   3088    When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
   3089 and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
   3090 see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
   3091 in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
   3092 the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
   3093 Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
   3094 not search for the file in the archive search path.
   3095 
   3096 
   3097 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
   3098 
   3099 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
   3100 .......................................
   3101 
   3102 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
   3103 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
   3104 
   3105    The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
   3106 pattern for the file name.
   3107 
   3108    The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
   3109 
   3110 `*'
   3111      matches any number of characters
   3112 
   3113 `?'
   3114      matches any single character
   3115 
   3116 `[CHARS]'
   3117      matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
   3118      may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
   3119      match any lower case letter
   3120 
   3121 `\'
   3122      quotes the following character
   3123 
   3124    When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
   3125 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
   3126 Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
   3127 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
   3128 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
   3129 
   3130    File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
   3131 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
   3132 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
   3133 
   3134    If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
   3135 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
   3136 linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
   3137 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
   3138 `data.o' rule will not be used:
   3139      .data : { *(.data) }
   3140      .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
   3141 
   3142    Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
   3143 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
   3144 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
   3145 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
   3146 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
   3147 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
   3148 file.
   3149 
   3150    `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   3151 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
   3152 order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
   3153 
   3154    `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
   3155 
   3156    When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
   3157 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
   3158 
   3159   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
   3160      It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
   3161      if 2 sections have the same name.
   3162 
   3163   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   3164      It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
   3165      if 2 sections have the same alignment.
   3166 
   3167   3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
   3168      treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
   3169 
   3170   4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
   3171      pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
   3172      section pattern).
   3173 
   3174   5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
   3175 
   3176    When both command line section sorting option and linker script
   3177 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
   3178 precedence over the command line option.
   3179 
   3180    If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
   3181 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
   3182 as nested sorting command.
   3183 
   3184   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
   3185      alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   3186      (wildcard section pattern)).
   3187 
   3188   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
   3189      `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   3190      (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   3191 
   3192    If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
   3193 command line option will be ignored.
   3194 
   3195    If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
   3196 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
   3197 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
   3198 
   3199    This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
   3200 files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
   3201 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
   3202 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
   3203 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
   3204 `.data' section in `.data'.
   3205      SECTIONS {
   3206        .text : { *(.text) }
   3207        .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
   3208        .data : { *(.data) }
   3209        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   3210      }
   3211 
   3212 
   3213 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   3214 
   3215 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
   3216 ........................................
   3217 
   3218 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
   3219 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
   3220 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
   3221 named `COMMON'.
   3222 
   3223    You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
   3224 other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
   3225 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
   3226 input files are placed in another section.
   3227 
   3228    In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
   3229 `.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
   3230      .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
   3231 
   3232    Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
   3233 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
   3234 common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
   3235 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
   3236 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
   3237 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
   3238 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
   3239 locations.
   3240 
   3241    You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
   3242 notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
   3243 
   3244 
   3245 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
   3246 
   3247 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
   3248 ............................................
   3249 
   3250 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
   3251 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
   3252 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
   3253 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
   3254 
   3255 
   3256 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
   3257 
   3258 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
   3259 .............................
   3260 
   3261 The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
   3262 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
   3263 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
   3264 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
   3265 same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
   3266 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
   3267 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
   3268 are written to output section `outputc'.
   3269 
   3270      SECTIONS {
   3271        outputa 0x10000 :
   3272          {
   3273          all.o
   3274          foo.o (.input1)
   3275          }
   3276        outputb :
   3277          {
   3278          foo.o (.input2)
   3279          foo1.o (.input1)
   3280          }
   3281        outputc :
   3282          {
   3283          *(.input1)
   3284          *(.input2)
   3285          }
   3286      }
   3287 
   3288 
   3289 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
   3290 
   3291 3.6.5 Output Section Data
   3292 -------------------------
   3293 
   3294 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
   3295 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
   3296 command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
   3297 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
   3298 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
   3299 
   3300    The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
   3301 four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
   3302 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
   3303 
   3304    For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
   3305 value of the symbol `addr':
   3306      BYTE(1)
   3307      LONG(addr)
   3308 
   3309    When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
   3310 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
   3311 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
   3312 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
   3313 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
   3314 
   3315    If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
   3316 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
   3317 endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
   3318 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
   3319 stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
   3320 
   3321    Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
   3322 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
   3323      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
   3324    whereas this will work:
   3325      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
   3326 
   3327    You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
   3328 current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
   3329 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
   3330 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
   3331 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
   3332 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
   3333 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
   3334 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
   3335 section.
   3336 
   3337    This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
   3338 value `0x90':
   3339      FILL(0x90909090)
   3340 
   3341    The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
   3342 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
   3343 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
   3344 `FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
   3345 details on the fill expression.
   3346 
   3347 
   3348 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
   3349 
   3350 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
   3351 -----------------------------
   3352 
   3353 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
   3354 commands.
   3355 
   3356 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
   3357      The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
   3358      file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
   3359      corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
   3360      output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
   3361      appears.
   3362 
   3363      This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
   3364      normally used for any other object file format.
   3365 
   3366 `CONSTRUCTORS'
   3367      When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
   3368      unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
   3369      destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
   3370      arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
   3371      automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
   3372      name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
   3373      tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
   3374      section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
   3375      `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
   3376 
   3377      The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
   3378      constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
   3379      Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
   3380      end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
   3381      number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
   3382      destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
   3383      actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
   3384      normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
   3385      `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
   3386      `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
   3387      `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
   3388 
   3389      For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
   3390      arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
   3391      addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
   3392      and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
   3393      linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
   3394      runtime code expects to see.
   3395 
   3396                 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3397                 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3398                 *(.ctors)
   3399                 LONG(0)
   3400                 __CTOR_END__ = .;
   3401                 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3402                 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3403                 *(.dtors)
   3404                 LONG(0)
   3405                 __DTOR_END__ = .;
   3406 
   3407      If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
   3408      which provides some control over the order in which global
   3409      constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
   3410      to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
   3411      the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
   3412      instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
   3413      `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
   3414      just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
   3415 
   3416      Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
   3417      automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
   3418      them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
   3419      and writing your own linker scripts.
   3420 
   3421 
   3422 
   3423 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
   3424 
   3425 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
   3426 -------------------------------
   3427 
   3428 The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
   3429 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
   3430 present in any of the input files.  For example:
   3431      .foo : { *(.foo) }
   3432    will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
   3433 `.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
   3434 are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
   3435 an output section will also create the output section.
   3436 
   3437    The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
   3438 Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
   3439 defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
   3440 obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
   3441 section is discarded.
   3442 
   3443    The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
   3444 input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
   3445 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
   3446 
   3447 
   3448 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
   3449 
   3450 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
   3451 -------------------------------
   3452 
   3453 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
   3454 like this:
   3455 
   3456      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   3457        [AT(LMA)]
   3458        [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
   3459        [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   3460        [CONSTRAINT]
   3461        {
   3462          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3463          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3464          ...
   3465        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   3466 
   3467    We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
   3468 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
   3469 section attributes.
   3470 
   3471 * Menu:
   3472 
   3473 * Output Section Type::		Output section type
   3474 * Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
   3475 * Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
   3476 * Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
   3477 * Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
   3478 * Output Section Region::	Output section region
   3479 * Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
   3480 * Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
   3481 
   3482 
   3483 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3484 
   3485 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
   3486 ...........................
   3487 
   3488 Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
   3489 parentheses.  The following types are defined:
   3490 
   3491 `NOLOAD'
   3492      The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
   3493      be loaded into memory when the program is run.
   3494 
   3495 `DSECT'
   3496 `COPY'
   3497 `INFO'
   3498 `OVERLAY'
   3499      These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
   3500      rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
   3501      marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
   3502      section when the program is run.
   3503 
   3504    The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
   3505 the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
   3506 the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
   3507 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
   3508 loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the `ROM' section will
   3509 appear in the linker output file as usual.
   3510      SECTIONS {
   3511        ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
   3512        ...
   3513      }
   3514 
   3515 
   3516 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3517 
   3518 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
   3519 ..........................
   3520 
   3521 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
   3522 *Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
   3523 in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
   3524 Address::).
   3525 
   3526    The expression LMA that follows the `AT' keyword specifies the load
   3527 address of the section.
   3528 
   3529    Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
   3530 memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::.  Note
   3531 that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
   3532 will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.
   3533 
   3534    If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
   3535 the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and
   3536 LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the
   3537 same region.  If there is no preceding output section or the section is
   3538 not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA.  *Note
   3539 Output Section Region::.
   3540 
   3541    This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
   3542 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
   3543 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
   3544 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
   3545 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
   3546 `0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
   3547 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
   3548 
   3549      SECTIONS
   3550        {
   3551        .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
   3552        .mdata 0x2000 :
   3553          AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
   3554          { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
   3555        .bss 0x3000 :
   3556          { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
   3557      }
   3558 
   3559    The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
   3560 with this linker script would include something like the following, to
   3561 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
   3562 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
   3563 linker script.
   3564 
   3565      extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
   3566      char *src = &_etext;
   3567      char *dst = &_data;
   3568 
   3569      /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
   3570      while (dst < &_edata) {
   3571        *dst++ = *src++;
   3572      }
   3573 
   3574      /* Zero bss */
   3575      for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
   3576        *dst = 0;
   3577 
   3578 
   3579 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3580 
   3581 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
   3582 ...............................
   3583 
   3584 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
   3585 
   3586 
   3587 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Constraint,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3588 
   3589 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
   3590 ..............................
   3591 
   3592 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
   3593 SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
   3594 sections, whether larger or smaller.
   3595 
   3596 
   3597 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Constraint,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3598 
   3599 3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
   3600 .................................
   3601 
   3602 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
   3603 its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
   3604 read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW'
   3605 respectively.
   3606 
   3607 
   3608 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Output Section Constraint,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3609 
   3610 3.6.8.6 Output Section Region
   3611 .............................
   3612 
   3613 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
   3614 using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
   3615 
   3616    Here is a simple example:
   3617      MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
   3618      SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
   3619 
   3620 
   3621 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3622 
   3623 3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
   3624 ...........................
   3625 
   3626 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
   3627 using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
   3628 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
   3629 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
   3630 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
   3631 segment at all.
   3632 
   3633    Here is a simple example:
   3634      PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
   3635      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
   3636 
   3637 
   3638 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3639 
   3640 3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
   3641 ...........................
   3642 
   3643 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
   3644 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
   3645 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
   3646 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
   3647 filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
   3648 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
   3649 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
   3650 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
   3651 become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
   3652 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
   3653 significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
   3654 number is big-endian.
   3655 
   3656    You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
   3657 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
   3658 
   3659    Here is a simple example:
   3660      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
   3661 
   3662 
   3663 File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
   3664 
   3665 3.6.9 Overlay Description
   3666 -------------------------
   3667 
   3668 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
   3669 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
   3670 the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
   3671 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
   3672 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
   3673 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
   3674 than another.
   3675 
   3676    Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
   3677 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
   3678 description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
   3679      OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
   3680        {
   3681          SECNAME1
   3682            {
   3683              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3684              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3685              ...
   3686            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3687          SECNAME2
   3688            {
   3689              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3690              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3691              ...
   3692            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3693          ...
   3694        } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3695 
   3696    Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
   3697 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
   3698 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
   3699 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
   3700 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
   3701 an `OVERLAY'.
   3702 
   3703    The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
   3704 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
   3705 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
   3706 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
   3707 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
   3708 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
   3709 location counter).
   3710 
   3711    If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
   3712 the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
   3713 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
   3714 section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
   3715 Commands.
   3716 
   3717    For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
   3718 provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
   3719 the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
   3720 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
   3721 section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
   3722 identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
   3723 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
   3724 
   3725    At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
   3726 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
   3727 section.
   3728 
   3729    Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
   3730 `SECTIONS' construct.
   3731        OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
   3732         {
   3733           .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3734           .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3735         }
   3736 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
   3737 0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
   3738 be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
   3739 defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
   3740 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
   3741 
   3742    C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
   3743 like the following.
   3744 
   3745        extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
   3746        memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
   3747                &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
   3748 
   3749    Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
   3750 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
   3751 example could have been written identically as follows.
   3752 
   3753        .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3754        PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
   3755        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
   3756        .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3757        PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
   3758        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
   3759        . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
   3760 
   3761 
   3762 File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
   3763 
   3764 3.7 MEMORY Command
   3765 ==================
   3766 
   3767 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
   3768 memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
   3769 
   3770    The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
   3771 memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
   3772 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
   3773 can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
   3774 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
   3775 regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
   3776 around to fit into the available regions.
   3777 
   3778    A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
   3779 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
   3780 wish.  The syntax is:
   3781      MEMORY
   3782        {
   3783          NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
   3784          ...
   3785        }
   3786 
   3787    The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
   3788 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
   3789 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3790 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
   3791 have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command.  However you can add
   3792 later alias names to existing memory regions with the *Note
   3793 REGION_ALIAS:: command.
   3794 
   3795    The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
   3796 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
   3797 not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
   3798 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
   3799 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
   3800 the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
   3801 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
   3802 
   3803    The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
   3804 `R'
   3805      Read-only section
   3806 
   3807 `W'
   3808      Read/write section
   3809 
   3810 `X'
   3811      Executable section
   3812 
   3813 `A'
   3814      Allocatable section
   3815 
   3816 `I'
   3817      Initialized section
   3818 
   3819 `L'
   3820      Same as `I'
   3821 
   3822 `!'
   3823      Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
   3824 
   3825    If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
   3826 `!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
   3827 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
   3828 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
   3829 
   3830    The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
   3831 memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
   3832 cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
   3833 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
   3834 
   3835    The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
   3836 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
   3837 and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
   3838 abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
   3839 
   3840    In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
   3841 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
   3842 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
   3843 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
   3844 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
   3845 executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
   3846 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
   3847 
   3848      MEMORY
   3849        {
   3850          rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
   3851          ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
   3852        }
   3853 
   3854    Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
   3855 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
   3856 output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
   3857 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
   3858 *Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
   3859 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
   3860 address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
   3861 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
   3862 will issue an error message.
   3863 
   3864    It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
   3865 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
   3866 
   3867        _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
   3868 
   3869 
   3870 File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
   3871 
   3872 3.8 PHDRS Command
   3873 =================
   3874 
   3875 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
   3876 "segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
   3877 loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
   3878 program with the `-p' option.
   3879 
   3880    When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
   3881 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
   3882 program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
   3883 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
   3884 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
   3885 
   3886    The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
   3887 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
   3888 precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
   3889 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
   3890 create any program headers other than the ones specified.
   3891 
   3892    The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
   3893 generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
   3894 ignore `PHDRS'.
   3895 
   3896    This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
   3897 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
   3898 
   3899      PHDRS
   3900      {
   3901        NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
   3902              [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
   3903      }
   3904 
   3905    The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
   3906 linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
   3907 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3908 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
   3909 have a distinct name.
   3910 
   3911    Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
   3912 system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
   3913 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
   3914 sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
   3915 to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
   3916 Phdr::.
   3917 
   3918    It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
   3919 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
   3920 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
   3921 section.
   3922 
   3923    If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
   3924 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
   3925 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
   3926 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
   3927 segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
   3928 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
   3929 
   3930    You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
   3931 program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
   3932 The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
   3933 file header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
   3934 the ELF program headers themselves.
   3935 
   3936    The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
   3937 value of the keyword.
   3938 
   3939 `PT_NULL' (0)
   3940      Indicates an unused program header.
   3941 
   3942 `PT_LOAD' (1)
   3943      Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
   3944      loaded from the file.
   3945 
   3946 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
   3947      Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
   3948 
   3949 `PT_INTERP' (3)
   3950      Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
   3951      be found.
   3952 
   3953 `PT_NOTE' (4)
   3954      Indicates a segment holding note information.
   3955 
   3956 `PT_SHLIB' (5)
   3957      A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
   3958      ELF ABI.
   3959 
   3960 `PT_PHDR' (6)
   3961      Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
   3962 
   3963 EXPRESSION
   3964      An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
   3965      may be used for types not defined above.
   3966 
   3967    You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
   3968 address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
   3969 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
   3970 LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
   3971 section attribute.
   3972 
   3973    The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
   3974 which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
   3975 explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
   3976 integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
   3977 
   3978    Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
   3979 headers used on a native ELF system.
   3980 
   3981      PHDRS
   3982      {
   3983        headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
   3984        interp PT_INTERP ;
   3985        text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
   3986        data PT_LOAD ;
   3987        dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
   3988      }
   3989 
   3990      SECTIONS
   3991      {
   3992        . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
   3993        .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
   3994        .text : { *(.text) } :text
   3995        .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
   3996        ...
   3997        . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
   3998        .data : { *(.data) } :data
   3999        .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
   4000        ...
   4001      }
   4002 
   4003 
   4004 File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
   4005 
   4006 3.9 VERSION Command
   4007 ===================
   4008 
   4009 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
   4010 only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
   4011 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
   4012 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
   4013 shared library.
   4014 
   4015    You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
   4016 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
   4017 can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
   4018 
   4019    The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
   4020      VERSION { version-script-commands }
   4021 
   4022    The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
   4023 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
   4024 version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
   4025 version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
   4026 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
   4027 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
   4028 library.
   4029 
   4030    The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
   4031 few examples.
   4032 
   4033      VERS_1.1 {
   4034      	 global:
   4035      		 foo1;
   4036      	 local:
   4037      		 old*;
   4038      		 original*;
   4039      		 new*;
   4040      };
   4041 
   4042      VERS_1.2 {
   4043      		 foo2;
   4044      } VERS_1.1;
   4045 
   4046      VERS_2.0 {
   4047      		 bar1; bar2;
   4048      	 extern "C++" {
   4049      		 ns::*;
   4050      		 "int f(int, double)";
   4051               }
   4052      } VERS_1.2;
   4053 
   4054    This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
   4055 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
   4056 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
   4057 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
   4058 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
   4059 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
   4060 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
   4061 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
   4062 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
   4063 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
   4064 
   4065    Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
   4066 upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
   4067 node `VERS_1.2'.
   4068 
   4069    Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
   4070 depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
   4071 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
   4072 
   4073    When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
   4074 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
   4075 unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
   4076 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
   4077 somewhere in the version script.  Note that it's slightly crazy to use
   4078 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
   4079 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
   4080 set exported for an old version.  That's wrong since older versions
   4081 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
   4082 
   4083    The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
   4084 what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
   4085 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
   4086 this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
   4087 
   4088    Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
   4089 the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
   4090 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
   4091 which won't.
   4092 
   4093      { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
   4094 
   4095    When you link an application against a shared library that has
   4096 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
   4097 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
   4098 each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
   4099 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
   4100 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
   4101 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
   4102 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
   4103 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
   4104 search for each symbol reference.
   4105 
   4106    The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
   4107 doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
   4108 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
   4109 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
   4110 the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
   4111 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
   4112 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
   4113 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
   4114 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
   4115 
   4116    There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
   4117 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
   4118 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
   4119 script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
   4120 maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
   4121      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   4122    in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
   4123 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
   4124 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
   4125 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
   4126 version script.
   4127 
   4128    The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
   4129 function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
   4130 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
   4131 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
   4132 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
   4133 
   4134    To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
   4135 file.  Here is an example:
   4136 
   4137      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
   4138      __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   4139      __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2");
   4140      __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
   4141 
   4142    In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
   4143 unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
   4144 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
   4145 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
   4146 
   4147    When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
   4148 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
   4149 this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
   4150 type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
   4151 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
   4152 have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
   4153 
   4154    If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
   4155 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
   4156 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
   4157 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
   4158 
   4159    You can also specify the language in the version script:
   4160 
   4161      VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
   4162 
   4163    The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
   4164 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
   4165 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
   4166 `version-script-commands'.
   4167 
   4168    Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
   4169 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
   4170 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
   4171 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
   4172 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
   4173 cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
   4174 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
   4175 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
   4176 when you upgrade.
   4177 
   4178 
   4179 File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
   4180 
   4181 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
   4182 ==================================
   4183 
   4184 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
   4185 that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
   4186 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
   4187 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
   4188 
   4189    You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
   4190 
   4191    The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
   4192 in expressions.
   4193 
   4194 * Menu:
   4195 
   4196 * Constants::			Constants
   4197 * Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
   4198 * Symbols::			Symbol Names
   4199 * Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
   4200 * Location Counter::		The Location Counter
   4201 * Operators::			Operators
   4202 * Evaluation::			Evaluation
   4203 * Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
   4204 * Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
   4205 
   4206 
   4207 File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
   4208 
   4209 3.10.1 Constants
   4210 ----------------
   4211 
   4212 All constants are integers.
   4213 
   4214    As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
   4215 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
   4216 Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for
   4217 hexadeciaml, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D'
   4218 for decimal.  Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is
   4219 considered to be decimal.
   4220 
   4221    In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
   4222 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively.  For example, the
   4223 following all refer to the same quantity:
   4224 
   4225      _fourk_1 = 4K;
   4226      _fourk_2 = 4096;
   4227      _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
   4228      _fourk_4 = 10000o;
   4229 
   4230    Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
   4231 the base suffixes mentioned above.
   4232 
   4233 
   4234 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbolic Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
   4235 
   4236 3.10.2 Symbolic Constants
   4237 -------------------------
   4238 
   4239 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the
   4240 `CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
   4241 
   4242 `MAXPAGESIZE'
   4243      The target's maximum page size.
   4244 
   4245 `COMMONPAGESIZE'
   4246      The target's default page size.
   4247 
   4248    So for example:
   4249 
   4250        .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
   4251 
   4252    will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
   4253 supported by the target.
   4254 
   4255 
   4256 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
   4257 
   4258 3.10.3 Symbol Names
   4259 -------------------
   4260 
   4261 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
   4262 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
   4263 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
   4264 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
   4265 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
   4266      "SECTION" = 9;
   4267      "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
   4268 
   4269    Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
   4270 safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
   4271 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
   4272 
   4273 
   4274 File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   4275 
   4276 3.10.4 Orphan Sections
   4277 ----------------------
   4278 
   4279 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
   4280 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
   4281 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
   4282 to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
   4283 heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
   4284 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
   4285 loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
   4286 then it places at the end of the file.
   4287 
   4288    For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
   4289 as well as section flag.
   4290 
   4291    If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
   4292 the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
   4293 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
   4294 section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
   4295 orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
   4296 representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
   4297 
   4298 
   4299 File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
   4300 
   4301 3.10.5 The Location Counter
   4302 ---------------------------
   4303 
   4304 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
   4305 output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
   4306 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
   4307 `SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
   4308 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
   4309 
   4310    Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
   4311 moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
   4312 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
   4313 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
   4314 creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
   4315 
   4316      SECTIONS
   4317      {
   4318        output :
   4319          {
   4320            file1(.text)
   4321            . = . + 1000;
   4322            file2(.text)
   4323            . += 1000;
   4324            file3(.text)
   4325          } = 0x12345678;
   4326      }
   4327    In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
   4328 at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
   4329 1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
   4330 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
   4331 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
   4332 (*note Output Section Fill::).
   4333 
   4334    Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
   4335 current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
   4336 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
   4337 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
   4338 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
   4339 Thus in a script like this:
   4340 
   4341      SECTIONS
   4342      {
   4343          . = 0x100
   4344          .text: {
   4345            *(.text)
   4346            . = 0x200
   4347          }
   4348          . = 0x500
   4349          .data: {
   4350            *(.data)
   4351            . += 0x600
   4352          }
   4353      }
   4354 
   4355    The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
   4356 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
   4357 `.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
   4358 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
   4359 backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
   4360 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
   4361 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
   4362 section itself.
   4363 
   4364    Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
   4365 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
   4366 needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
   4367 
   4368      SECTIONS
   4369      {
   4370          start_of_text = . ;
   4371          .text: { *(.text) }
   4372          end_of_text = . ;
   4373 
   4374          start_of_data = . ;
   4375          .data: { *(.data) }
   4376          end_of_data = . ;
   4377      }
   4378 
   4379    If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
   4380 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
   4381 `.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
   4382 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
   4383 particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
   4384 associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
   4385 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
   4386 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
   4387 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
   4388 script was written as follows:
   4389 
   4390      SECTIONS
   4391      {
   4392          start_of_text = . ;
   4393          .text: { *(.text) }
   4394          end_of_text = . ;
   4395 
   4396          start_of_data = . ;
   4397          .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
   4398          .data: { *(.data) }
   4399          end_of_data = . ;
   4400      }
   4401 
   4402    This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
   4403 `start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
   4404 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
   4405 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
   4406 section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
   4407 write:
   4408 
   4409      SECTIONS
   4410      {
   4411          start_of_text = . ;
   4412          .text: { *(.text) }
   4413          end_of_text = . ;
   4414 
   4415          . = . ;
   4416          start_of_data = . ;
   4417          .data: { *(.data) }
   4418          end_of_data = . ;
   4419      }
   4420 
   4421    Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
   4422 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
   4423 
   4424 
   4425 File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
   4426 
   4427 3.10.6 Operators
   4428 ----------------
   4429 
   4430 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
   4431 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
   4432      precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
   4433      (highest)
   4434      1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
   4435      2               left            *  /  %
   4436      3               left            +  -
   4437      4               left            >>  <<
   4438      5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
   4439      6               left            &
   4440      7               left            |
   4441      8               left            &&
   4442      9               left            ||
   4443      10              right           ? :
   4444      11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
   4445      (lowest)
   4446    Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
   4447 
   4448 
   4449 File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
   4450 
   4451 3.10.7 Evaluation
   4452 -----------------
   4453 
   4454 The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
   4455 an expression when absolutely necessary.
   4456 
   4457    The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
   4458 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
   4459 regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
   4460 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
   4461 
   4462    However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
   4463 until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
   4464 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
   4465 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
   4466 
   4467    The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
   4468 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
   4469 allocation.
   4470 
   4471    Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
   4472 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
   4473 
   4474    If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
   4475 available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
   4476 following
   4477      SECTIONS
   4478        {
   4479          .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
   4480            { *(.text) }
   4481        }
   4482 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
   4483 address'.
   4484 
   4485 
   4486 File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
   4487 
   4488 3.10.8 The Section of an Expression
   4489 -----------------------------------
   4490 
   4491 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
   4492 or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
   4493 fixed offset from the base of a section.
   4494 
   4495    The position of the expression within the linker script determines
   4496 whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
   4497 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
   4498 section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
   4499 
   4500    A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
   4501 request relocatable output using the `-r' option.  That means that a
   4502 further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
   4503 section will be the section of the relative expression.
   4504 
   4505    A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
   4506 through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
   4507 will not have any particular associated section.
   4508 
   4509    You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
   4510 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
   4511 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
   4512 section `.data':
   4513      SECTIONS
   4514        {
   4515          .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
   4516        }
   4517    If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
   4518 `.data' section.
   4519 
   4520 
   4521 File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
   4522 
   4523 3.10.9 Builtin Functions
   4524 ------------------------
   4525 
   4526 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
   4527 use in linker script expressions.
   4528 
   4529 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
   4530      Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
   4531      value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
   4532      absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
   4533      symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
   4534      Section::.
   4535 
   4536 `ADDR(SECTION)'
   4537      Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
   4538      script must previously have defined the location of that section.
   4539      In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
   4540      identical values:
   4541           SECTIONS { ...
   4542             .output1 :
   4543               {
   4544               start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
   4545               ...
   4546               }
   4547             .output :
   4548               {
   4549               symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
   4550               symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
   4551               }
   4552           ... }
   4553 
   4554 `ALIGN(ALIGN)'
   4555 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
   4556      Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
   4557      to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
   4558      change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
   4559      on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
   4560      be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
   4561      ALIGN)').
   4562 
   4563      Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
   4564      next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
   4565      variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
   4566      input sections:
   4567           SECTIONS { ...
   4568             .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
   4569               *(.data)
   4570               variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
   4571             }
   4572           ... }
   4573      The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
   4574      location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
   4575      attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
   4576      Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
   4577      value of a symbol.
   4578 
   4579      The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
   4580 
   4581 `ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
   4582      Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
   4583      section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
   4584      when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
   4585      following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
   4586      stored as the first value in that section.
   4587           SECTIONS{ ...
   4588             .output {
   4589               LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
   4590               ...
   4591               }
   4592           ... }
   4593 
   4594 `BLOCK(EXP)'
   4595      This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
   4596      scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
   4597      output section.
   4598 
   4599 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
   4600      This is equivalent to either
   4601           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
   4602      or
   4603           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
   4604      depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
   4605      pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
   4606      expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
   4607      latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
   4608      memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
   4609      bytes in the on-disk file.
   4610 
   4611      This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
   4612      not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
   4613      script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
   4614      should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
   4615      for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
   4616 
   4617      Example:
   4618             . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
   4619 
   4620 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
   4621      This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
   4622      evaluation purposes.
   4623 
   4624             . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
   4625 
   4626 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
   4627      This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
   4628      option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
   4629      option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
   4630      otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
   4631      aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
   4632      target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
   4633      between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
   4634 
   4635             . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
   4636 
   4637 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
   4638      Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
   4639      defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
   4640      return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
   4641      symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
   4642      set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
   4643      section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
   4644      is preserved:
   4645 
   4646           SECTIONS { ...
   4647             .text : {
   4648               begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
   4649               ...
   4650             }
   4651             ...
   4652           }
   4653 
   4654 `LENGTH(MEMORY)'
   4655      Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4656 
   4657 `LOADADDR(SECTION)'
   4658      Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally
   4659      the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
   4660      is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
   4661      LMA::).
   4662 
   4663 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4664      Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4665 
   4666 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4667      Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4668 
   4669 `NEXT(EXP)'
   4670      Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
   4671      This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
   4672      the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
   4673      file, the two functions are equivalent.
   4674 
   4675 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
   4676      Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4677 
   4678 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
   4679      Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
   4680      value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
   4681      option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
   4682      DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
   4683      used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
   4684      sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
   4685 
   4686 `SIZEOF(SECTION)'
   4687      Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
   4688      been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
   4689      evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
   4690      example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
   4691           SECTIONS{ ...
   4692             .output {
   4693               .start = . ;
   4694               ...
   4695               .end = . ;
   4696               }
   4697             symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
   4698             symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
   4699           ... }
   4700 
   4701 `SIZEOF_HEADERS'
   4702 `sizeof_headers'
   4703      Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
   4704      information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
   4705      can use this number when setting the start address of the first
   4706      section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
   4707 
   4708      When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
   4709      `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
   4710      number of program headers before it has determined all the section
   4711      addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
   4712      additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
   4713      room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
   4714      using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
   4715      script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
   4716      headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
   4717      `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
   4718 
   4719 
   4720 File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
   4721 
   4722 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
   4723 ============================
   4724 
   4725 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
   4726 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
   4727 linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
   4728 linker will report an error.
   4729 
   4730    An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
   4731 
   4732    Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
   4733 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
   4734 
   4735    Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
   4736 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
   4737 script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
   4738 
   4739 
   4740 File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
   4741 
   4742 4 Machine Dependent Features
   4743 ****************************
   4744 
   4745 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
   4746 describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
   4747 not listed.
   4748 
   4749 * Menu:
   4750 
   4751 
   4752 * H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
   4753 
   4754 * i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
   4755 
   4756 * ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
   4757 
   4758 * HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
   4759 
   4760 * M68K::			`ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   4761 
   4762 * MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
   4763 
   4764 * MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
   4765 
   4766 * M68HC11/68HC12::		`ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4767 
   4768 * PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4769 
   4770 * PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4771 
   4772 * SPU ELF::			`ld' and SPU ELF Support
   4773 
   4774 * TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
   4775 
   4776 * WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4777 
   4778 * Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4779 
   4780 
   4781 File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4782 
   4783 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
   4784 =======================
   4785 
   4786 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
   4787 specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4788 
   4789 _relaxing address modes_
   4790      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4791      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4792      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4793 
   4794 _synthesizing instructions_
   4795      `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
   4796      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4797      changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
   4798      linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
   4799      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4800 
   4801 _bit manipulation instructions_
   4802      `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
   4803      biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
   4804      bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
   4805      to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
   4806      address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
   4807      into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
   4808      page of memory).
   4809 
   4810 _system control instructions_
   4811      `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
   4812      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4813      changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
   4814      turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
   4815      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4816 
   4817 
   4818 File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4819 
   4820 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
   4821 =================================
   4822 
   4823 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
   4824 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
   4825 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
   4826 instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
   4827 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
   4828 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
   4829 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
   4830 
   4831    For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
   4832 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
   4833 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
   4834 
   4835      try
   4836      libtry.a
   4837      tryca
   4838      libtryca.a
   4839 
   4840 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
   4841 two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
   4842 
   4843    You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
   4844 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
   4845 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
   4846 specifies a library.
   4847 
   4848    `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
   4849 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
   4850 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
   4851 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
   4852 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
   4853 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
   4854 not itself call any subroutines).
   4855 
   4856    The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
   4857 erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
   4858 default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
   4859 be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
   4860 unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
   4861 
   4862    The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
   4863 further details.
   4864 
   4865 
   4866 File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4867 
   4868 4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4869 ====================================================
   4870 
   4871 4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
   4872 -----------------------
   4873 
   4874 For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
   4875 when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4876 
   4877 _relaxing address modes_
   4878      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4879      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4880      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4881 
   4882      `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
   4883      transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
   4884      page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
   4885 
   4886 _relaxing gcc instruction group_
   4887      When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
   4888      instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
   4889      addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
   4890      instructions.
   4891 
   4892 
   4893 4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
   4894 ---------------------------
   4895 
   4896 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
   4897 function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
   4898 the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
   4899 instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
   4900 pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
   4901 function trampoline.
   4902 
   4903 
   4904 File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4905 
   4906 4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
   4907 ===========================
   4908 
   4909 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
   4910 between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
   4911 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
   4912 option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
   4913 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
   4914 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
   4915 given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
   4916 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
   4917 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
   4918 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
   4919 
   4920    The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
   4921 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
   4922 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
   4923 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
   4924 straight away.
   4925 
   4926    The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that
   4927 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
   4928 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
   4929 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
   4930 
   4931    The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
   4932 executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
   4933 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
   4934 
   4935    The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
   4936 `.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
   4937 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
   4938 `--target1-abs' switches override the default.
   4939 
   4940    The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
   4941 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
   4942 and target defaults are as follows:
   4943 `rel'
   4944      `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
   4945 
   4946 `abs'
   4947      `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
   4948 
   4949 `got-rel'
   4950      `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
   4951 
   4952    The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
   4953 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
   4954 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
   4955 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
   4956 objects.
   4957 
   4958    In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
   4959 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
   4960 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
   4961 
   4962    In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
   4963 relocations are ignored.
   4964 
   4965    Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
   4966 with a branch to the following veneer:
   4967 
   4968      TST rM, #1
   4969      MOVEQ PC, rM
   4970      BX Rn
   4971 
   4972    This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
   4973 cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
   4974 clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
   4975 rare cases.
   4976 
   4977    The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
   4978 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
   4979 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
   4980 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
   4981 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
   4982 
   4983    This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
   4984 to specify it if you are using that target.
   4985 
   4986    The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
   4987 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
   4988 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
   4989 code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
   4990 before the support code can read the intended values.
   4991 
   4992    The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
   4993 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
   4994 register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
   4995 at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
   4996 only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
   4997 workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
   4998 further details.
   4999 
   5000    If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
   5001 workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
   5002 you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
   5003 if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
   5004 The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
   5005 
   5006    If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
   5007 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
   5008 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
   5009 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
   5010 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
   5011 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
   5012 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
   5013 
   5014    The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
   5015 when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
   5016 size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
   5017 object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
   5018 enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
   5019 diagnosed.
   5020 
   5021    The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
   5022 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
   5023 `wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
   5024 linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
   5025 using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
   5026 
   5027    The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
   5028 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
   5029 PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
   5030 used to generate relocatable binaries.
   5031 
   5032    The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
   5033 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
   5034 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
   5035 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
   5036 controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
   5037 placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
   5038 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
   5039 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
   5040 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
   5041 where they should be placed.
   5042 
   5043    The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
   5044 controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
   5045 stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them.  If it is
   5046 positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
   5047 branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
   5048 then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
   5049 using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
   5050 smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
   5051 service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
   5052 
   5053    The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
   5054 
   5055    Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
   5056 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
   5057 otherwise.
   5058 
   5059 
   5060 File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5061 
   5062 4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
   5063 ====================================
   5064 
   5065 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
   5066 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
   5067 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
   5068 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
   5069 sub-spaces.
   5070 
   5071    Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
   5072 sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
   5073 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
   5074 stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
   5075 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
   5076 and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
   5077 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
   5078 sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
   5079 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   5080 negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
   5081 `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
   5082 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
   5083 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
   5084 
   5085    Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   5086 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
   5087 create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
   5088 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
   5089 
   5090 
   5091 File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5092 
   5093 4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   5094 ====================================
   5095 
   5096 The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
   5097 choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
   5098 `target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
   5099 scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
   5100 single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
   5101 instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
   5102 negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   5103 `multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
   5104 file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
   5105 same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
   5106 different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   5107 
   5108 
   5109 File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5110 
   5111 4.7 `ld' and MMIX
   5112 =================
   5113 
   5114 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
   5115 object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
   5116 format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
   5117 formats.
   5118 
   5119    There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
   5120 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
   5121 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
   5122 symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
   5123 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
   5124 register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
   5125 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
   5126 `Main' for `mmo' files.
   5127 
   5128    Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
   5129 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
   5130 default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
   5131 section.
   5132 
   5133    Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
   5134 section, are left out from an mmo file.
   5135 
   5136 
   5137 File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5138 
   5139 4.8 `ld' and MSP430
   5140 ===================
   5141 
   5142 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
   5143 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
   5144 MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
   5145 the linker).
   5146 
   5147    The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
   5148 specific:
   5149 
   5150 ``.vectors''
   5151      Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
   5152 
   5153 ``.bootloader''
   5154      Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
   5155      code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   5156 
   5157 ``.infomem''
   5158      Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
   5159      this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   5160 
   5161 ``.infomemnobits''
   5162      This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
   5163      this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
   5164 
   5165 ``.noinit''
   5166      Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
   5167 
   5168      The last two sections are used by gcc.
   5169 
   5170 
   5171 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5172 
   5173 4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   5174 =======================================
   5175 
   5176 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
   5177 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
   5178 fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
   5179 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
   5180 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
   5181 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine
   5182 `-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case
   5183 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
   5184 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
   5185 
   5186 `--bss-plt'
   5187      Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
   5188      code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
   5189      security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
   5190      writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
   5191      `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
   5192      if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
   5193      compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
   5194      (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
   5195 
   5196 `--secure-plt'
   5197      `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
   5198      `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
   5199      linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
   5200      layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
   5201      old style BSS PLT.
   5202 
   5203 `--sdata-got'
   5204      The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
   5205      sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
   5206      location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
   5207      initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
   5208      reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
   5209      allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
   5210      relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
   5211      always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
   5212      accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
   5213      `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
   5214      use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
   5215      useful for other compilers that may do so.
   5216 
   5217 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5218      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   5219      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5220 
   5221 `--no-tls-optimize'
   5222      PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
   5223      used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
   5224      the optimization.
   5225 
   5226 
   5227 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5228 
   5229 4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   5230 ==========================================
   5231 
   5232 `--stub-group-size'
   5233      Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
   5234      placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
   5235      sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
   5236      group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
   5237      offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
   5238      sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
   5239      it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
   5240      it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
   5241      serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
   5242      chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   5243      negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
   5244      and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
   5245      section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
   5246      behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
   5247      values of `N' respectively.
   5248 
   5249      Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   5250      single input section larger than the group size specified will of
   5251      course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
   5252      are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
   5253      stub.
   5254 
   5255 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5256      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   5257      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5258 
   5259 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
   5260      These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
   5261      a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
   5262      function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
   5263      a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
   5264      properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
   5265      to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
   5266      default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
   5267      Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
   5268 
   5269 `--no-tls-optimize'
   5270      PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
   5271      sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
   5272      disable the optimization.
   5273 
   5274 `--no-opd-optimize'
   5275      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
   5276      corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
   5277      by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
   5278      Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
   5279 
   5280 `--non-overlapping-opd'
   5281      Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
   5282      `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
   5283      the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
   5284      next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
   5285 
   5286 `--no-toc-optimize'
   5287      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
   5288      Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
   5289      the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
   5290      a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
   5291      a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
   5292      relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
   5293      unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
   5294      reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
   5295      discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
   5296      reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
   5297      assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
   5298      disable the optimization.
   5299 
   5300 `--no-multi-toc'
   5301      By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
   5302      entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
   5303      total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
   5304      grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
   5305      its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
   5306      inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
   5307      cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
   5308      exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
   5309      Use this option to turn off this feature.
   5310 
   5311 
   5312 File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5313 
   5314 4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
   5315 =============================
   5316 
   5317 `--plugin'
   5318      This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
   5319 
   5320 `--no-overlays'
   5321      Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
   5322      regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
   5323      `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
   5324      off all this special overlay handling.
   5325 
   5326 `--emit-stub-syms'
   5327      This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
   5328      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5329 
   5330 `--extra-overlay-stubs'
   5331      This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
   5332      calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
   5333      calls to non-overlay regions.
   5334 
   5335 `--local-store=lo:hi'
   5336      `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
   5337      address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
   5338      range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
   5339 
   5340 `--stack-analysis'
   5341      SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
   5342      unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
   5343      under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
   5344      option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
   5345      `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
   5346      the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
   5347      stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
   5348      for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
   5349      for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
   5350      find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
   5351      recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
   5352      under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
   5353      for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
   5354      link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
   5355      stack usage and calls will be given.
   5356 
   5357 `--emit-stack-syms'
   5358      This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
   5359      `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
   5360      the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
   5361      `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
   5362      `<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
   5363      the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
   5364      size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
   5365      section `SHN_ABS'.
   5366 
   5367 
   5368 File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5369 
   5370 4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
   5371 ================================================
   5372 
   5373 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
   5374 versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
   5375 supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
   5376 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
   5377 depends on the default specified by the specific target.
   5378 
   5379 
   5380 File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5381 
   5382 4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   5383 ==================================
   5384 
   5385 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
   5386 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
   5387 command line options mentioned here.
   5388 
   5389 _import libraries_
   5390      The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
   5391      libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
   5392      are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
   5393      archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
   5394      for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
   5395      command line option.
   5396 
   5397 _exporting DLL symbols_
   5398      The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
   5399 
   5400     _using auto-export functionality_
   5401           By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
   5402           functionality, which is controlled by the following command
   5403           line options:
   5404 
   5405              * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
   5406 
   5407              * -exclude-symbols
   5408 
   5409              * -exclude-libs
   5410 
   5411              * -exclude-modules-for-implib
   5412 
   5413              * -version-script
   5414 
   5415           When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the
   5416           non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
   5417           the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the
   5418           system's runtime and libraries.  As it will often not be
   5419           desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
   5420           private functions that are not part of any public interface,
   5421           the command-line options listed above may be used to filter
   5422           symbols out from the list for exporting.  The `--output-def'
   5423           option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
   5424           symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
   5425 
   5426           If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
   5427           command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
   5428           _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
   5429 
   5430              * A DEF file is used.
   5431 
   5432              * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
   5433                __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
   5434 
   5435     _using a DEF file_
   5436           Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
   5437           file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
   5438           should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
   5439           named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
   5440           to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
   5441           `.def' or `.DEF'.
   5442 
   5443                gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
   5444 
   5445           Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
   5446           unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
   5447 
   5448           Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
   5449           `xyz.dll':
   5450 
   5451                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
   5452 
   5453                EXPORTS
   5454                foo
   5455                bar
   5456                _bar = bar
   5457                another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
   5458                var1 DATA
   5459 
   5460           This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
   5461           and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
   5462           symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
   5463           `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
   5464           and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
   5465           `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
   5466           object.
   5467 
   5468           The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
   5469           name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5470           the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
   5471 
   5472           When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
   5473           than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
   5474           instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5475           the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
   5476 
   5477           With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
   5478           specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
   5479           non-default base address for the image.
   5480 
   5481           If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
   5482           or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
   5483           same as the filename specified on the command line.
   5484 
   5485           The complete specification of an export symbol is:
   5486 
   5487                EXPORTS
   5488                  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
   5489                     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
   5490                  [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
   5491 
   5492           Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
   5493           declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
   5494           declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
   5495           `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
   5496           the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
   5497           `<integer>' alias.
   5498 
   5499           The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
   5500 
   5501           `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
   5502           table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
   5503           (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
   5504           otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
   5505           name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
   5506           any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
   5507 
   5508           `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
   5509           function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
   5510           reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
   5511           be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
   5512 
   5513           `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
   5514           well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
   5515           read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
   5516           to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
   5517           code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
   5518           explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
   5519           attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
   5520 
   5521           `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
   5522           not put it into the static import library used to resolve
   5523           imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
   5524           the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
   5525           using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
   5526           without an import library.
   5527 
   5528           See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
   5529           specification of other DEF file statements
   5530 
   5531           While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
   5532           with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
   5533 
   5534     _Using decorations_
   5535           Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
   5536           source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
   5537           to be exported is declared as:
   5538 
   5539                __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
   5540                __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5541 
   5542           All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
   5543           any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
   5544           in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
   5545           disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
   5546           used.
   5547 
   5548           Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
   5549           _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
   5550           dllimport, instead:
   5551 
   5552                __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
   5553                __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5554 
   5555           This complicates the structure of library header files,
   5556           because when included by the library itself the header must
   5557           declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
   5558           included by client code the header must declare them as
   5559           dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
   5560           used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
   5561           declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
   5562           `automatic data imports' for more information.
   5563 
   5564 _automatic data imports_
   5565      The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
   5566      only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
   5567      let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
   5568      with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
   5569      existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
   5570      libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
   5571      initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
   5572      decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
   5573      POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
   5574      `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
   5575      by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
   5576      itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
   5577      ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
   5578 
   5579      auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
   5580      additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
   5581 
   5582      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   5583      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   5584 
   5585      The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
   5586      occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
   5587      difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
   5588      feature, described below.
   5589 
   5590      For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
   5591      classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
   5592      variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
   5593      particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
   5594      the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
   5595      fixing these references at runtime without the additional
   5596      information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
   5597      standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
   5598      these references.
   5599 
   5600      The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
   5601      references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
   5602      adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
   5603      to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
   5604      versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
   5605      provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
   5606      support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
   5607      compiled result will run without error on an older system.
   5608 
   5609      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
   5610      explicitly enabled as needed.
   5611 
   5612 _direct linking to a dll_
   5613      The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
   5614      including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
   5615      libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
   5616      does the traditional import library method, especially when
   5617      linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
   5618      import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
   5619      stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
   5620      exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
   5621      processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
   5622      tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
   5623      particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
   5624 
   5625      Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
   5626      other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
   5627      number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
   5628      the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
   5629      order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
   5630 
   5631      For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
   5632      attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
   5633 
   5634           libxxx.dll.a
   5635           xxx.dll.a
   5636           libxxx.a
   5637           xxx.lib
   5638           cygxxx.dll (*)
   5639           libxxx.dll
   5640           xxx.dll
   5641 
   5642      before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
   5643 
   5644      (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
   5645      `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
   5646      `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
   5647      standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
   5648      effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
   5649 
   5650      Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
   5651      use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
   5652      of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
   5653      conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
   5654      environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
   5655      could coexist on the same machine.
   5656 
   5657      The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
   5658      applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
   5659      libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
   5660 
   5661           bin/
   5662           	cygxxx.dll
   5663           lib/
   5664           	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
   5665           	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
   5666 
   5667      Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
   5668      done two ways:
   5669 
   5670      1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
   5671           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
   5672 
   5673      However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
   5674      names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
   5675      specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
   5676      libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
   5677 
   5678      2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
   5679      directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
   5680      should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
   5681      making the app/dll.
   5682 
   5683           ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
   5684 
   5685      Then you can link without any make environment changes.
   5686 
   5687           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
   5688 
   5689      This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
   5690      the following is perfectly legal
   5691 
   5692           bin/
   5693           	cygxxx-5.dll
   5694           lib/
   5695           	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
   5696 
   5697      Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
   5698      even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
   5699      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
   5700 
   5701      Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
   5702      justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
   5703      are three reasons:
   5704 
   5705      1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
   5706      work with auto-imported data.
   5707 
   5708      2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
   5709      the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
   5710      indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
   5711      the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
   5712      and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
   5713 
   5714      3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
   5715      is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
   5716      API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
   5717      of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
   5718 
   5719      So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
   5720      true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
   5721      dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
   5722      binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
   5723      massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
   5724      requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
   5725      will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
   5726 
   5727 _symbol aliasing_
   5728 
   5729     _adding additional names_
   5730           Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
   5731           names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
   5732           also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
   5733           DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
   5734           optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
   5735           file:
   5736 
   5737                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5738 
   5739                EXPORTS
   5740                foo
   5741                _foo = foo
   5742 
   5743           The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
   5744 
   5745           Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
   5746           the source code using the "weak" attribute:
   5747 
   5748                void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
   5749                void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
   5750 
   5751           See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
   5752           weak symbols.
   5753 
   5754     _renaming symbols_
   5755           Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
   5756           cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
   5757           exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
   5758           directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
   5759           library, if it is created).  In the following example:
   5760 
   5761                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5762 
   5763                EXPORTS
   5764                _foo = foo
   5765 
   5766           The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
   5767           `_foo'.
   5768 
   5769      Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
   5770      unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
   5771      If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
   5772      _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
   5773      are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
   5774      option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
   5775      use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
   5776      both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
   5777      symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
   5778      symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
   5779 
   5780 _weak externals_
   5781      The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
   5782      called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
   5783      symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
   5784      other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
   5785         * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
   5786           historically called lazy externals.
   5787 
   5788         * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
   5789           libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
   5790 
   5791         * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
   5792           implemented.
   5793      As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
   5794      symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
   5795      the symbol uses a default value.
   5796 
   5797 _aligned common symbols_
   5798      As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to
   5799      specify the desired alignment for a common symbol.  This
   5800      information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the
   5801      linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object
   5802      file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and
   5803      respected when laying out the common symbols.  Native tools will
   5804      be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but
   5805      will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue
   5806      noisy warnings about unknown linker directives.
   5807 
   5808 
   5809 File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5810 
   5811 4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   5812 ===============================
   5813 
   5814 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
   5815 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
   5816 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
   5817 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
   5818 example, with the command:
   5819 
   5820      SECTIONS
   5821      {
   5822        .text : {
   5823          *(.literal .text)
   5824        }
   5825      }
   5826 
   5827 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
   5828 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
   5829 range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
   5830 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
   5831 `.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
   5832 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
   5833 the files would follow.
   5834 
   5835    Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
   5836 provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
   5837 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
   5838 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
   5839 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
   5840 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
   5841 the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
   5842 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
   5843 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
   5844 `CALLN' instructions.
   5845 
   5846    For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
   5847 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
   5848 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
   5849 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
   5850 not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
   5851 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
   5852 alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
   5853 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
   5854 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
   5855 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
   5856 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
   5857 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
   5858 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
   5859 are required for correctness.
   5860 
   5861    The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
   5862 control the linker:
   5863 
   5864 `--no-relax'
   5865      Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
   5866      default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
   5867 
   5868 `--size-opt'
   5869      When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
   5870      size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
   5871      insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
   5872      target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
   5873      required to preserve the correctness of the code.
   5874 
   5875 
   5876 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
   5877 
   5878 5 BFD
   5879 *****
   5880 
   5881 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
   5882 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
   5883 object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
   5884 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
   5885 it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
   5886 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
   5887 object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
   5888 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
   5889 your configuration.
   5890 
   5891    As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
   5892 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
   5893 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
   5894 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
   5895 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
   5896 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
   5897 greater speed.
   5898 
   5899    One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
   5900 is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
   5901 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
   5902 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
   5903 
   5904 * Menu:
   5905 
   5906 * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
   5907 
   5908 
   5909 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
   5910 
   5911 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
   5912 ===================================
   5913 
   5914 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
   5915 the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
   5916 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
   5917 the object file's data structures.
   5918 
   5919    As different information from the object files is required, BFD
   5920 reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
   5921 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
   5922 tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
   5923 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
   5924 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
   5925 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
   5926 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
   5927 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
   5928 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
   5929 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
   5930 convert it into the chosen output format.
   5931 
   5932 * Menu:
   5933 
   5934 * BFD information loss::	Information Loss
   5935 * Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
   5936 
   5937 
   5938 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
   5939 
   5940 5.1.1 Information Loss
   5941 ----------------------
   5942 
   5943 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
   5944 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
   5945 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
   5946 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
   5947 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
   5948 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
   5949 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
   5950 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
   5951 internally, so the link is performed correctly).
   5952 
   5953    Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
   5954 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
   5955 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
   5956 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
   5957 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
   5958 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
   5959 command language.
   5960 
   5961    _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
   5962 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
   5963 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
   5964 internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
   5965 possible data richness through the transformation between external to
   5966 internal and back to external formats.
   5967 
   5968    This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
   5969 format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
   5970 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
   5971 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
   5972 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
   5973 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
   5974 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
   5975 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
   5976 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
   5977 information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
   5978 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
   5979 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
   5980 `b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
   5981 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
   5982 
   5983 
   5984 File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
   5985 
   5986 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
   5987 ------------------------------------------
   5988 
   5989 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
   5990 least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
   5991 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
   5992 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
   5993 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
   5994 conversions.  
   5995 
   5996 _files_
   5997      Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
   5998      architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
   5999      pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
   6000      magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
   6001      so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
   6002      write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
   6003      stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
   6004      files may be used with one another.
   6005 
   6006 _sections_
   6007      Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
   6008      the section's original address in the object file, size and
   6009      alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
   6010      data structures.
   6011 
   6012 _symbols_
   6013      Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
   6014      file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
   6015      flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
   6016      relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
   6017      section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
   6018      symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
   6019      varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
   6020      the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
   6021      for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
   6022      of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
   6023 
   6024      Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
   6025      so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
   6026      pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
   6027      Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
   6028      information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
   6029      This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
   6030      linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
   6031 
   6032      There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
   6033      format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
   6034      example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
   6035      within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
   6036      information will be preserved.
   6037 
   6038 _relocation level_
   6039      Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
   6040      symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
   6041      section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
   6042      descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
   6043      the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
   6044      relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
   6045      method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
   6046      instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
   6047      record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
   6048      routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
   6049      byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
   6050      such relocation type.
   6051 
   6052 _line numbers_
   6053      Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
   6054      mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
   6055      output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
   6056      symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
   6057      number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
   6058      of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
   6059      allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
   6060      is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
   6061      offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
   6062      simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
   6063      formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
   6064 
   6065 
   6066 File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
   6067 
   6068 6 Reporting Bugs
   6069 ****************
   6070 
   6071 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
   6072 
   6073    Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
   6074 or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
   6075 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
   6076 better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
   6077 
   6078    In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   6079 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   6080 
   6081 * Menu:
   6082 
   6083 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   6084 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   6085 
   6086 
   6087 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   6088 
   6089 6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
   6090 =========================
   6091 
   6092 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
   6093 guidelines:
   6094 
   6095    * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
   6096      a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
   6097 
   6098    * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   6099 
   6100    * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   6101      may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
   6102      object files are correct.
   6103 
   6104    * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
   6105      improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
   6106 
   6107 
   6108 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   6109 
   6110 6.2 How to Report Bugs
   6111 ======================
   6112 
   6113 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
   6114 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
   6115 contact that organization first.
   6116 
   6117    You can find contact information for many support companies and
   6118 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
   6119 
   6120    Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
   6121 `http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
   6122 
   6123    The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   6124 *report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
   6125 leave it out, state it!
   6126 
   6127    Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
   6128 problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
   6129 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
   6130 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
   6131 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
   6132 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
   6133 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
   6134 doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
   6135 specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   6136 and the most helpful.
   6137 
   6138    Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
   6139 the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
   6140 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
   6141 
   6142    Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
   6143 bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   6144 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
   6145 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   6146 
   6147    To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   6148 
   6149    * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
   6150      `--version' argument.
   6151 
   6152      Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
   6153      looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
   6154 
   6155    * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
   6156      patches made to the `BFD' library.
   6157 
   6158    * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
   6159      and version number.
   6160 
   6161    * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
   6162      "`gcc-2.7'".
   6163 
   6164    * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
   6165      observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
   6166      important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
   6167      from make) is sufficient.
   6168 
   6169      If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
   6170      wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
   6171 
   6172    * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
   6173      the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
   6174      files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
   6175      10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
   6176      or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
   6177      file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
   6178      going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
   6179      large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
   6180 
   6181      If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
   6182      `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
   6183      object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
   6184      `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
   6185      `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
   6186 
   6187    * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   6188      incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
   6189 
   6190      Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
   6191      will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
   6192      might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
   6193      not give us a chance to make a mistake.
   6194 
   6195      Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
   6196      still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
   6197      such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
   6198      a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
   6199      copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
   6200      crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
   6201      was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
   6202      crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
   6203      observations.
   6204 
   6205    * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
   6206      diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
   6207      Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   6208      discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
   6209      by line number.
   6210 
   6211      The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
   6212      in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
   6213      information to us.
   6214 
   6215    Here are some things that are not necessary:
   6216 
   6217    * A description of the envelope of the bug.
   6218 
   6219      Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   6220      which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   6221      changes will not affect it.
   6222 
   6223      This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
   6224      we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
   6225      debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
   6226      examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   6227 
   6228      Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
   6229      of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   6230      output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   6231      less time, and so on.
   6232 
   6233      However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
   6234      this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
   6235      used.
   6236 
   6237    * A patch for the bug.
   6238 
   6239      A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
   6240      omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
   6241      assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
   6242      with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
   6243      might not understand it at all.
   6244 
   6245      Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
   6246      construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
   6247      path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
   6248      not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
   6249      that the bug is fixed.
   6250 
   6251      And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
   6252      your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
   6253      test case will help us to understand.
   6254 
   6255    * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   6256 
   6257      Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
   6258      such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   6259 
   6260 
   6261 File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
   6262 
   6263 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
   6264 **************************************
   6265 
   6266 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
   6267 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
   6268 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
   6269 Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
   6270 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
   6271 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
   6272 described here.
   6273 
   6274    In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
   6275 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
   6276 features to make use of them.
   6277 
   6278    You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
   6279 `-c' command-line option.
   6280 
   6281    Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
   6282 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
   6283 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
   6284 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
   6285 a warning message, but continues processing the script.
   6286 
   6287    Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
   6288 
   6289    You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
   6290 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
   6291 list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
   6292 
   6293 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
   6294 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   6295      Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
   6296      the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
   6297      use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
   6298      present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
   6299      at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
   6300      `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
   6301      still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
   6302      line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
   6303 
   6304 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
   6305      Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
   6306      in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
   6307 
   6308      IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
   6309 
   6310 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
   6311      Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
   6312      should be a power of two.
   6313 
   6314 `BASE EXPRESSION'
   6315      Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
   6316      absolute addresses) in the output file.
   6317 
   6318 `CHIP EXPRESSION'
   6319 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
   6320      This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
   6321 
   6322 `END'
   6323      This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
   6324      compatibility.
   6325 
   6326 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   6327      Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
   6328      language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
   6329 
   6330        1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
   6331 
   6332        2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
   6333 
   6334        3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
   6335           `COFF'
   6336 
   6337 `LIST ANYTHING...'
   6338      Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
   6339      `ld' command-line option `-M'.
   6340 
   6341      The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
   6342      with no change in its effect.
   6343 
   6344 `LOAD FILENAME'
   6345 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
   6346      Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
   6347      same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
   6348      line.
   6349 
   6350 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
   6351      OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
   6352      MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
   6353      option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
   6354 
   6355 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   6356 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
   6357      Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
   6358      in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
   6359      MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
   6360      `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
   6361      first in your output file, in the order specified.
   6362 
   6363 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
   6364 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
   6365 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
   6366      Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
   6367      linker input files.
   6368 
   6369 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
   6370 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
   6371 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
   6372      You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
   6373      specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
   6374      you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
   6375      the _first_ sets the start address.
   6376 
   6377 
   6378 File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
   6379 
   6380 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
   6381 *****************************************
   6382 
   6383                         Version 1.1, March 2000
   6384 
   6385      Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   6386      51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
   6387 
   6388      Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
   6389      of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
   6390 
   6391 
   6392   0. PREAMBLE
   6393 
   6394      The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
   6395      written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
   6396      the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
   6397      modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
   6398      this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
   6399      credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
   6400      modifications made by others.
   6401 
   6402      This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
   6403      works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
   6404      It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
   6405      license designed for free software.
   6406 
   6407      We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
   6408      free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
   6409      free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
   6410      that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
   6411      software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
   6412      of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
   6413      We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
   6414      instruction or reference.
   6415 
   6416 
   6417   1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
   6418 
   6419      This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
   6420      notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
   6421      under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
   6422      any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
   6423      and is addressed as "you."
   6424 
   6425      A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
   6426      Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
   6427      modifications and/or translated into another language.
   6428 
   6429      A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
   6430      section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
   6431      relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
   6432      Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
   6433      nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
   6434      (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
   6435      mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
   6436      The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
   6437      the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
   6438      philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
   6439 
   6440      The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
   6441      titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
   6442      the notice that says that the Document is released under this
   6443      License.
   6444 
   6445      The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
   6446      listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
   6447      that says that the Document is released under this License.
   6448 
   6449      A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
   6450      represented in a format whose specification is available to the
   6451      general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
   6452      and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
   6453      composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
   6454      widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
   6455      text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
   6456      formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
   6457      otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
   6458      to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
   6459      Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
   6460 
   6461      Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
   6462      ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
   6463      SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
   6464      standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
   6465      Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
   6466      can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
   6467      or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
   6468      available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
   6469      processors for output purposes only.
   6470 
   6471      The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
   6472      plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
   6473      material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
   6474      works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
   6475      Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
   6476      work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
   6477 
   6478   2. VERBATIM COPYING
   6479 
   6480      You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
   6481      commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
   6482      copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
   6483      applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
   6484      add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
   6485      may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
   6486      or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
   6487      you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
   6488      distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
   6489      the conditions in section 3.
   6490 
   6491      You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
   6492      and you may publicly display copies.
   6493 
   6494   3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
   6495 
   6496      If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
   6497      100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
   6498      must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
   6499      all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
   6500      Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
   6501      and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
   6502      front cover must present the full title with all words of the
   6503      title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
   6504      on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
   6505      covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
   6506      satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
   6507      other respects.
   6508 
   6509      If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
   6510      legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
   6511      reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
   6512      adjacent pages.
   6513 
   6514      If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
   6515      numbering more than 100, you must either include a
   6516      machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
   6517      state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
   6518      computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
   6519      of the Document, free of added material, which the general
   6520      network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
   6521      charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the
   6522      latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
   6523      begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
   6524      this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
   6525      location until at least one year after the last time you
   6526      distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
   6527      retailers) of that edition to the public.
   6528 
   6529      It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
   6530      the Document well before redistributing any large number of
   6531      copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
   6532      version of the Document.
   6533 
   6534   4. MODIFICATIONS
   6535 
   6536      You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
   6537      under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
   6538      release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
   6539      the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
   6540      licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
   6541      whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
   6542      things in the Modified Version:
   6543 
   6544      A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
   6545      distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous
   6546      versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
   6547      History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title
   6548      as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version
   6549      gives permission.
   6550      B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
   6551      entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
   6552      Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal
   6553      authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it
   6554      has less than five).
   6555      C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
   6556      Modified Version, as the publisher.
   6557      D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
   6558      E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
   6559      adjacent to the other copyright notices.
   6560      F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
   6561      notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
   6562      under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the
   6563      Addendum below.
   6564      G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
   6565      Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
   6566      license notice.
   6567      H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
   6568      I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
   6569      to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
   6570        publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
   6571      If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
   6572      create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
   6573      the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item
   6574      describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous
   6575      sentence.
   6576      J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
   6577        public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
   6578      likewise    the network locations given in the Document for
   6579      previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the
   6580      "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work
   6581      that was published at    least four years before the Document
   6582      itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers
   6583      to gives permission.
   6584      K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
   6585      preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
   6586       substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
   6587      and/or dedications given therein.
   6588      L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
   6589      unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
   6590      or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
   6591      M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section
   6592      may not be included in the Modified Version.
   6593      N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to
   6594      conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
   6595 
   6596      If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
   6597      appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
   6598      material copied from the Document, you may at your option
   6599      designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
   6600      add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
   6601      Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
   6602      other section titles.
   6603 
   6604      You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
   6605      nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
   6606      parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
   6607      been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
   6608      of a standard.
   6609 
   6610      You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
   6611      and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
   6612      of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
   6613      passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
   6614      added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
   6615      Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
   6616      previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
   6617      you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
   6618      replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
   6619      publisher that added the old one.
   6620 
   6621      The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
   6622      License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
   6623      assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
   6624 
   6625   5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
   6626 
   6627      You may combine the Document with other documents released under
   6628      this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
   6629      modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
   6630      all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
   6631      unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
   6632      combined work in its license notice.
   6633 
   6634      The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
   6635      multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
   6636      copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
   6637      but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
   6638      by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
   6639      original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
   6640      unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
   6641      the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
   6642      combined work.
   6643 
   6644      In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
   6645      "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
   6646      entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
   6647      "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
   6648      must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
   6649 
   6650   6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
   6651 
   6652      You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
   6653      documents released under this License, and replace the individual
   6654      copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
   6655      that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
   6656      rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
   6657      documents in all other respects.
   6658 
   6659      You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
   6660      distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
   6661      a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
   6662      this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
   6663      that document.
   6664 
   6665   7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
   6666 
   6667      A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
   6668      separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
   6669      a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
   6670      Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
   6671      copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is
   6672      called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
   6673      other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
   6674      account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
   6675      derivative works of the Document.
   6676 
   6677      If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
   6678      copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
   6679      quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
   6680      placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
   6681      aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
   6682      aggregate.
   6683 
   6684   8. TRANSLATION
   6685 
   6686      Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
   6687      distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
   6688      4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
   6689      permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
   6690      translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
   6691      original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
   6692      translation of this License provided that you also include the
   6693      original English version of this License.  In case of a
   6694      disagreement between the translation and the original English
   6695      version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
   6696 
   6697   9. TERMINATION
   6698 
   6699      You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
   6700      except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
   6701      attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
   6702      void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
   6703      License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
   6704      from you under this License will not have their licenses
   6705      terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
   6706 
   6707  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
   6708 
   6709      The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
   6710      the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
   6711      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
   6712      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
   6713      http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
   6714 
   6715      Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
   6716      number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
   6717      version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
   6718      have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
   6719      that specified version or of any later version that has been
   6720      published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
   6721      the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
   6722      you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
   6723      Free Software Foundation.
   6724 
   6725 
   6726 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
   6727 ====================================================
   6728 
   6729 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
   6730 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
   6731 notices just after the title page:
   6732 
   6733      Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
   6734      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
   6735      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
   6736      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
   6737      with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
   6738      Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
   6739      A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
   6740      Free Documentation License."
   6741 
   6742    If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
   6743 instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
   6744 Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
   6745 LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
   6746 
   6747    If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
   6748 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
   6749 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
   6750 permit their use in free software.
   6751 
   6752 
   6753 File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
   6754 
   6755 LD Index
   6756 ********
   6757 
   6758 [index]
   6759 * Menu:
   6760 
   6761 * ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
   6762 * -(:                                    Options.            (line  675)
   6763 * --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  693)
   6764 * --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  717)
   6765 * --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1527)
   6766 * --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  945)
   6767 * --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  951)
   6768 * --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  113)
   6769 * --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  703)
   6770 * --auxiliary=NAME:                      Options.            (line  235)
   6771 * --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 1926)
   6772 * --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1532)
   6773 * --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   28)
   6774 * --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
   6775 * --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1489)
   6776 * --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1489)
   6777 * --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  799)
   6778 * --cref:                                Options.            (line  811)
   6779 * --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line  988)
   6780 * --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  520)
   6781 * --default-symver:                      Options.            (line  984)
   6782 * --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  839)
   6783 * --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  852)
   6784 * --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1701)
   6785 * --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1836)
   6786 * --disable-long-section-names:          Options.            (line 1542)
   6787 * --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1452)
   6788 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1849)
   6789 * --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1564)
   6790 * --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  566)
   6791 * --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  570)
   6792 * --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1537)
   6793 * --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1707)
   6794 * --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6795 * --dynamic-linker=FILE:                 Options.            (line  865)
   6796 * --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  791)
   6797 * --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  795)
   6798 * --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  788)
   6799 * --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  775)
   6800 * --dynamicbase:                         Options.            (line 1885)
   6801 * --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1448)
   6802 * --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  455)
   6803 * --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
   6804 * --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
   6805 * --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   6806 * --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6807 * --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1693)
   6808 * --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1716)
   6809 * --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1854)
   6810 * --enable-long-section-names:           Options.            (line 1542)
   6811 * --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1452)
   6812 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1841)
   6813 * --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1564)
   6814 * --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  167)
   6815 * --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1401)
   6816 * --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  177)
   6817 * --exclude-modules-for-implib:          Options.            (line  188)
   6818 * --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1606)
   6819 * --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1582)
   6820 * --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  201)
   6821 * --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   6822 * --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  872)
   6823 * --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1612)
   6824 * --filter=NAME:                         Options.            (line  256)
   6825 * --fix-cortex-a8:                       i960.               (line   39)
   6826 * --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   49)
   6827 * --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   62)
   6828 * --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  464)
   6829 * --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  877)
   6830 * --forceinteg:                          Options.            (line 1890)
   6831 * --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  124)
   6832 * --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   6833 * --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  887)
   6834 * --got:                                 Options.            (line 1939)
   6835 * --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
   6836 * --gpsize=VALUE:                        Options.            (line  289)
   6837 * --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1461)
   6838 * --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1469)
   6839 * --heap:                                Options.            (line 1618)
   6840 * --help:                                Options.            (line  918)
   6841 * --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1625)
   6842 * --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  487)
   6843 * --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1634)
   6844 * --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1639)
   6845 * --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  348)
   6846 * --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  315)
   6847 * --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   6848 * --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1648)
   6849 * --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1653)
   6850 * --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1657)
   6851 * --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1662)
   6852 * --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1667)
   6853 * --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1671)
   6854 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  148)
   6855 * --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6856 * --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  419)
   6857 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  693)
   6858 * --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  717)
   6859 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  951)
   6860 * --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  703)
   6861 * --no-bind:                             Options.            (line 1904)
   6862 * --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  799)
   6863 * --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  823)
   6864 * --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  852)
   6865 * --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6866 * --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  111)
   6867 * --no-export-dynamic:                   Options.            (line  201)
   6868 * --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  872)
   6869 * --no-fix-cortex-a8:                    i960.               (line   39)
   6870 * --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  887)
   6871 * --no-isolation:                        Options.            (line 1897)
   6872 * --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  930)
   6873 * --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6874 * --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  433)
   6875 * --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6876 * --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   6877 * --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  909)
   6878 * --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6879 * --no-seh:                              Options.            (line 1900)
   6880 * --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
   6881 * --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6882 * --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6883 * --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 1920)
   6884 * --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  937)
   6885 * --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line  979)
   6886 * --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line  992)
   6887 * --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line 1001)
   6888 * --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  118)
   6889 * --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line 1005)
   6890 * --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line 1009)
   6891 * --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6892 * --nxcompat:                            Options.            (line 1893)
   6893 * --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT:               Options.            (line 1021)
   6894 * --omagic:                              Options.            (line  424)
   6895 * --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1684)
   6896 * --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1676)
   6897 * --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  439)
   6898 * --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line 1034)
   6899 * --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  124)
   6900 * --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   6901 * --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  909)
   6902 * --print-map:                           Options.            (line  382)
   6903 * --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1475)
   6904 * --relax:                               Options.            (line 1050)
   6905 * --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
   6906 * --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6907 * --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6908 * --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  468)
   6909 * --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME:        Options.            (line 1071)
   6910 * --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  511)
   6911 * --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
   6912 * --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1859)
   6913 * --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1227)
   6914 * --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   26)
   6915 * --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1169)
   6916 * --sort-section=alignment:              Options.            (line 1184)
   6917 * --sort-section=name:                   Options.            (line 1180)
   6918 * --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1188)
   6919 * --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1193)
   6920 * --stack:                               Options.            (line 1865)
   6921 * --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   6922 * --stats:                               Options.            (line 1206)
   6923 * --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  498)
   6924 * --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  502)
   6925 * --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6926 * --stub-group-size=N <1>:               ARM.                (line  129)
   6927 * --stub-group-size=N:                   HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6928 * --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1872)
   6929 * --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
   6930 * --sysroot=DIRECTORY:                   Options.            (line 1210)
   6931 * --target-help:                         Options.            (line  922)
   6932 * --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   32)
   6933 * --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   32)
   6934 * --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   37)
   6935 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
   6936 * --trace:                               Options.            (line  507)
   6937 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  576)
   6938 * --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1215)
   6939 * --tsaware:                             Options.            (line 1910)
   6940 * --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  533)
   6941 * --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  551)
   6942 * --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1246)
   6943 * --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   74)
   6944 * --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables:      ARM.                (line   23)
   6945 * --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1275)
   6946 * --version:                             Options.            (line  560)
   6947 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1281)
   6948 * --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   83)
   6949 * --warn-alternate-em:                   Options.            (line 1393)
   6950 * --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1292)
   6951 * --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1360)
   6952 * --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1365)
   6953 * --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1379)
   6954 * --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1383)
   6955 * --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1390)
   6956 * --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1396)
   6957 * --wdmdriver:                           Options.            (line 1907)
   6958 * --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1405)
   6959 * --wrap=SYMBOL:                         Options.            (line 1419)
   6960 * -A ARCH:                               Options.            (line  112)
   6961 * -a KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  105)
   6962 * -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  727)
   6963 * -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  124)
   6964 * -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  730)
   6965 * -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  740)
   6966 * -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1162)
   6967 * -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  747)
   6968 * -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  762)
   6969 * -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  769)
   6970 * -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  148)
   6971 * -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  730)
   6972 * -d:                                    Options.            (line  158)
   6973 * -dc:                                   Options.            (line  158)
   6974 * -dn:                                   Options.            (line  747)
   6975 * -dp:                                   Options.            (line  158)
   6976 * -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  520)
   6977 * -dy:                                   Options.            (line  730)
   6978 * -E:                                    Options.            (line  201)
   6979 * -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  167)
   6980 * -EB:                                   Options.            (line  228)
   6981 * -EL:                                   Options.            (line  231)
   6982 * -F NAME:                               Options.            (line  256)
   6983 * -f NAME:                               Options.            (line  235)
   6984 * -fini=NAME:                            Options.            (line  280)
   6985 * -g:                                    Options.            (line  286)
   6986 * -G VALUE:                              Options.            (line  289)
   6987 * -h NAME:                               Options.            (line  297)
   6988 * -i:                                    Options.            (line  306)
   6989 * -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  865)
   6990 * -init=NAME:                            Options.            (line  309)
   6991 * -L DIR:                                Options.            (line  348)
   6992 * -l NAMESPEC:                           Options.            (line  315)
   6993 * -M:                                    Options.            (line  382)
   6994 * -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  372)
   6995 * -Map=MAPFILE:                          Options.            (line  926)
   6996 * -N:                                    Options.            (line  424)
   6997 * -n:                                    Options.            (line  419)
   6998 * -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  747)
   6999 * -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line 1015)
   7000 * -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  445)
   7001 * -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  439)
   7002 * -pie:                                  Options.            (line 1034)
   7003 * -q:                                    Options.            (line  455)
   7004 * -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1044)
   7005 * -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1047)
   7006 * -r:                                    Options.            (line  468)
   7007 * -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  487)
   7008 * -rpath-link=DIR:                       Options.            (line 1107)
   7009 * -rpath=DIR:                            Options.            (line 1085)
   7010 * -s:                                    Options.            (line  498)
   7011 * -S:                                    Options.            (line  502)
   7012 * -shared:                               Options.            (line 1162)
   7013 * -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  297)
   7014 * -static:                               Options.            (line  747)
   7015 * -t:                                    Options.            (line  507)
   7016 * -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  511)
   7017 * -Tbss=ORG:                             Options.            (line 1236)
   7018 * -Tdata=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1236)
   7019 * -Ttext-segment=ORG:                    Options.            (line 1242)
   7020 * -Ttext=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1236)
   7021 * -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  533)
   7022 * -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  541)
   7023 * -V:                                    Options.            (line  560)
   7024 * -v:                                    Options.            (line  560)
   7025 * -X:                                    Options.            (line  570)
   7026 * -x:                                    Options.            (line  566)
   7027 * -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  585)
   7028 * -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  576)
   7029 * -z defs:                               Options.            (line  937)
   7030 * -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  589)
   7031 * -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  945)
   7032 * .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7033 * /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
   7034                                                              (line   21)
   7035 * :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
   7036                                                              (line    6)
   7037 * =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
   7038                                                              (line    6)
   7039 * >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
   7040                                                              (line    6)
   7041 * [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
   7042                                                              (line   29)
   7043 * ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
   7044 * absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   7045 * absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   7046 * ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   7047 * ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   7048 * address, section:                      Output Section Address.
   7049                                                              (line    6)
   7050 * ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
   7051 * ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
   7052 * align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7053 * align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7054 * ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7055 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7056 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
   7057                                                              (line    6)
   7058 * aligned common symbols:                WIN32.              (line  418)
   7059 * ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   7060 * allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7061 * architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
   7062                                                              (line   72)
   7063 * architectures:                         Options.            (line  112)
   7064 * archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  315)
   7065 * archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   7066 * arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
   7067 * arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
   7068 * ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
   7069 * AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
   7070 * ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   7071                                                              (line    9)
   7072 * assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
   7073                                                              (line    9)
   7074 * assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
   7075 * AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7076 * AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7077 * automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  185)
   7078 * back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
   7079 * BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
   7080 * BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   28)
   7081 * BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
   7082 * BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
   7083 * big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  228)
   7084 * binary input format:                   Options.            (line  124)
   7085 * BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   75)
   7086 * bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
   7087 * bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   7088 * bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   7089 * BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7090                                                              (line    6)
   7091 * C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
   7092                                                              (line   19)
   7093 * CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
   7094 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   7095 * combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1292)
   7096 * command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
   7097 * command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
   7098 * common allocation:                     Options.            (line  158)
   7099 * common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
   7100                                                              (line   20)
   7101 * common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
   7102                                                              (line    6)
   7103 * COMMONPAGESIZE:                        Symbolic Constants. (line   13)
   7104 * compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  148)
   7105 * CONSTANT:                              Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
   7106 * constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
   7107 * constraints on output sections:        Output Section Constraint.
   7108                                                              (line    6)
   7109 * CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
   7110                                                              (line   19)
   7111 * constructors:                          Options.            (line  541)
   7112 * constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
   7113                                                              (line   19)
   7114 * Cortex-A8 erratum workaround:          i960.               (line   39)
   7115 * crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   7116 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
   7117                                                              (line    9)
   7118 * creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  152)
   7119 * cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  811)
   7120 * cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
   7121                                                              (line   56)
   7122 * current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7123 * data:                                  Output Section Data.
   7124                                                              (line    6)
   7125 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
   7126                                                              (line   80)
   7127 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  101)
   7128 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  107)
   7129 * dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1220)
   7130 * DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1676)
   7131 * default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
   7132 * default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
   7133 * DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
   7134 * deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  566)
   7135 * demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   7136 * demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  852)
   7137 * direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  233)
   7138 * discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
   7139                                                              (line    6)
   7140 * discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7141 * DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1676)
   7142 * DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1707)
   7143 * dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7144 * dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
   7145 * dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
   7146 * dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  865)
   7147 * dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  201)
   7148 * ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7149 * emulation:                             Options.            (line  372)
   7150 * emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
   7151 * END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
   7152 * endianness:                            Options.            (line  228)
   7153 * entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7154 * entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  167)
   7155 * entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
   7156 * ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7157 * error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
   7158 * example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
   7159 * exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
   7160 * expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
   7161 * expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
   7162 * expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   7163 * expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
   7164 * EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   7165                                                              (line   13)
   7166 * fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   7167 * file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   7168                                                              (line    6)
   7169 * FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   61)
   7170 * filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
   7171                                                              (line    9)
   7172 * fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
   7173                                                              (line    6)
   7174 * FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7175                                                              (line   39)
   7176 * finalization function:                 Options.            (line  280)
   7177 * first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
   7178 * first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7179 * FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   49)
   7180 * FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   62)
   7181 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
   7182                                                              (line   20)
   7183 * forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
   7184                                                              (line    6)
   7185 * forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
   7186                                                              (line    6)
   7187 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  464)
   7188 * FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
   7189 * functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
   7190 * garbage collection <1>:                Options.            (line  909)
   7191 * garbage collection <2>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   7192 * garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  887)
   7193 * generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  445)
   7194 * GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
   7195 * GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
   7196 * GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
   7197 * grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
   7198 * groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  675)
   7199 * H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
   7200 * header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   7201 * heap size:                             Options.            (line 1618)
   7202 * help:                                  Options.            (line  918)
   7203 * holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
   7204 * holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
   7205                                                              (line   39)
   7206 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   7207 * HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   7208 * i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
   7209 * image base:                            Options.            (line 1625)
   7210 * implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
   7211                                                              (line    6)
   7212 * import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
   7213 * INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
   7214 * including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
   7215 * including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1405)
   7216 * incremental link:                      Options.            (line  306)
   7217 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
   7218                                                              (line   25)
   7219 * initialization function:               Options.            (line  309)
   7220 * initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   26)
   7221 * input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
   7222 * input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
   7223                                                              (line    9)
   7224 * input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
   7225 * input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  507)
   7226 * input format:                          Options.            (line  124)
   7227 * input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
   7228 * input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
   7229                                                              (line    6)
   7230 * input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
   7231                                                              (line    6)
   7232 * input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
   7233                                                              (line    6)
   7234 * input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
   7235 * INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
   7236 * INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   7237                                                              (line   30)
   7238 * insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
   7239                                                              (line   30)
   7240 * integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
   7241 * integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   15)
   7242 * internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
   7243 * invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
   7244 * K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
   7245 * KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   7246 * l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   74)
   7247 * lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
   7248 * ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   7249 * LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
   7250 * len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   74)
   7251 * LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   74)
   7252 * LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  135)
   7253 * library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   7254 * link map:                              Options.            (line  382)
   7255 * link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1107)
   7256 * linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   7257 * linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
   7258                                                              (line    6)
   7259 * linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
   7260 * linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
   7261 * linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
   7262 * linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
   7263 * linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
   7264 * linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
   7265 * LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
   7266 * little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  231)
   7267 * LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
   7268 * load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7269 * LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
   7270 * loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
   7271                                                              (line   22)
   7272 * local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  570)
   7273 * location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
   7274 * LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7275                                                              (line    6)
   7276 * M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
   7277 * M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
   7278 * machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   7279                                                              (line   72)
   7280 * machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
   7281 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
   7282 * MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
   7283 * MAXPAGESIZE:                           Symbolic Constants. (line   10)
   7284 * MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7285 * memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   34)
   7286 * memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7287 * memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
   7288                                                              (line    6)
   7289 * memory usage:                          Options.            (line  930)
   7290 * MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
   7291 * Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
   7292 * MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
   7293 * MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
   7294 * NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
   7295 * name, section:                         Output Section Name.
   7296                                                              (line    6)
   7297 * names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
   7298 * naming the output file:                Options.            (line  439)
   7299 * NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   7300 * NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  419)
   7301 * NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  111)
   7302 * NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  118)
   7303 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
   7304                                                              (line   56)
   7305 * NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
   7306                                                              (line   22)
   7307 * not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   7308 * o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   69)
   7309 * objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
   7310 * object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
   7311 * object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
   7312 * object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
   7313 * object size:                           Options.            (line  289)
   7314 * OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  424)
   7315 * ONLY_IF_RO:                            Output Section Constraint.
   7316                                                              (line    6)
   7317 * ONLY_IF_RW:                            Output Section Constraint.
   7318                                                              (line    6)
   7319 * opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
   7320 * operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
   7321 * options:                               Options.            (line    6)
   7322 * ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
   7323 * org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   69)
   7324 * ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   69)
   7325 * ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  156)
   7326 * orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
   7327 * output file after errors:              Options.            (line 1009)
   7328 * output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
   7329 * output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
   7330 * output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
   7331                                                              (line    6)
   7332 * output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
   7333                                                              (line    6)
   7334 * output section data:                   Output Section Data.
   7335                                                              (line    6)
   7336 * OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
   7337 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   7338                                                              (line   72)
   7339 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
   7340 * OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
   7341                                                              (line    6)
   7342 * overlays:                              Overlay Description.
   7343                                                              (line    6)
   7344 * partial link:                          Options.            (line  468)
   7345 * PE import table prefixing:             ARM.                (line   23)
   7346 * PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line   61)
   7347 * PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  124)
   7348 * position independent executables:      Options.            (line 1036)
   7349 * PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
   7350 * PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
   7351 * PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   7352 * PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
   7353 * PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
   7354 * PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
   7355 * PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   7356 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   7357 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   7358 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   7359 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   7360 * PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   7361 * PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   7362 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   7363 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   7364 * precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
   7365 * prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
   7366                                                              (line   22)
   7367 * program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7368 * program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
   7369                                                              (line    6)
   7370 * program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   7371 * program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7372 * PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
   7373 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
   7374 * PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
   7375 * QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   7376                                                              (line    6)
   7377 * quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
   7378 * read-only text:                        Options.            (line  419)
   7379 * read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  424)
   7380 * region alias:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
   7381 * region names:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
   7382 * REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION):           REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
   7383 * regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   7384 * relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   7385 * relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1050)
   7386 * relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
   7387 * relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
   7388 * relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
   7389 * relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
   7390 * relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   7391 * relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  468)
   7392 * removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
   7393                                                              (line    6)
   7394 * reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   7395 * requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
   7396 * retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  455)
   7397 * retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1071)
   7398 * ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   26)
   7399 * round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7400 * round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7401 * runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  297)
   7402 * runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1085)
   7403 * runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  211)
   7404 * scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   15)
   7405 * scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
   7406                                                              (line   20)
   7407 * script files:                          Options.            (line  520)
   7408 * scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
   7409 * search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  348)
   7410 * search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
   7411 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
   7412 * SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
   7413 * section address:                       Output Section Address.
   7414                                                              (line    6)
   7415 * section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   7416 * section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   7417 * section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1383)
   7418 * section data:                          Output Section Data.
   7419                                                              (line    6)
   7420 * section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
   7421                                                              (line    6)
   7422 * section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7423 * section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
   7424 * section name:                          Output Section Name.
   7425                                                              (line    6)
   7426 * section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
   7427                                                              (line    6)
   7428 * section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7429 * section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
   7430                                                              (line    6)
   7431 * section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
   7432                                                              (line    6)
   7433 * SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
   7434 * sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
   7435                                                              (line    6)
   7436 * segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1236)
   7437 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  159)
   7438 * segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7439 * shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1164)
   7440 * SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7441                                                              (line    6)
   7442 * SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7443 * SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   7444 * small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
   7445                                                              (line   20)
   7446 * SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
   7447                                                              (line   58)
   7448 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
   7449                                                              (line   54)
   7450 * SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
   7451                                                              (line   46)
   7452 * SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   7453 * SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7454 * SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   7455 * SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   7456 * SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   7457 * SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   7458 * SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7459 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7460                                                              (line    6)
   7461 * stack size:                            Options.            (line 1865)
   7462 * standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
   7463 * start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7464 * STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
   7465 * strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  498)
   7466 * strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  502)
   7467 * stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1071)
   7468 * STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  129)
   7469 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
   7470                                                              (line    6)
   7471 * suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   15)
   7472 * symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
   7473 * symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
   7474 * symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
   7475 * symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  576)
   7476 * symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
   7477 * symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  487)
   7478 * symbolic constants:                    Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
   7479 * symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  839)
   7480 * symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
   7481 * symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1071)
   7482 * synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1050)
   7483 * synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
   7484 * TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
   7485 * TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   32)
   7486 * TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   37)
   7487 * text segment origin, cmd line:         Options.            (line 1243)
   7488 * thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
   7489 * TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   7490 * traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1215)
   7491 * trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7492 * trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7493 * unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   7494 * undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  533)
   7495 * undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
   7496                                                              (line   13)
   7497 * undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1379)
   7498 * uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
   7499                                                              (line    6)
   7500 * unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
   7501                                                              (line   39)
   7502 * usage:                                 Options.            (line  918)
   7503 * USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   74)
   7504 * using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   57)
   7505 * using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
   7506 * Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  156)
   7507 * variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
   7508 * verbose:                               Options.            (line 1275)
   7509 * version:                               Options.            (line  560)
   7510 * version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
   7511 * version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1281)
   7512 * VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
   7513 * versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
   7514 * VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   83)
   7515 * warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1292)
   7516 * warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1383)
   7517 * warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1379)
   7518 * weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  401)
   7519 * what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
   7520 * wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   7521                                                              (line    6)
   7522 * Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
   7523 * Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
   7524 
   7525 
   7526 
   7527 Tag Table:
   7528 Node: Top759
   7529 Node: Overview1542
   7530 Node: Invocation2656
   7531 Node: Options3064
   7532 Node: Environment90607
   7533 Node: Scripts92367
   7534 Node: Basic Script Concepts94101
   7535 Node: Script Format96808
   7536 Node: Simple Example97671
   7537 Node: Simple Commands100767
   7538 Node: Entry Point101273
   7539 Node: File Commands102032
   7540 Node: Format Commands106033
   7541 Node: REGION_ALIAS107989
   7542 Node: Miscellaneous Commands112821
   7543 Node: Assignments116197
   7544 Node: Simple Assignments116688
   7545 Node: PROVIDE118424
   7546 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN119629
   7547 Node: Source Code Reference119873
   7548 Node: SECTIONS123453
   7549 Node: Output Section Description125344
   7550 Node: Output Section Name126431
   7551 Node: Output Section Address127307
   7552 Node: Input Section129027
   7553 Node: Input Section Basics129828
   7554 Node: Input Section Wildcards133046
   7555 Node: Input Section Common137779
   7556 Node: Input Section Keep139261
   7557 Node: Input Section Example139751
   7558 Node: Output Section Data140719
   7559 Node: Output Section Keywords143496
   7560 Node: Output Section Discarding147065
   7561 Node: Output Section Attributes148246
   7562 Node: Output Section Type149347
   7563 Node: Output Section LMA150501
   7564 Node: Forced Output Alignment153014
   7565 Node: Forced Input Alignment153282
   7566 Node: Output Section Constraint153671
   7567 Node: Output Section Region154099
   7568 Node: Output Section Phdr154532
   7569 Node: Output Section Fill155196
   7570 Node: Overlay Description156338
   7571 Node: MEMORY160641
   7572 Node: PHDRS164974
   7573 Node: VERSION170013
   7574 Node: Expressions178088
   7575 Node: Constants179017
   7576 Node: Symbolic Constants179892
   7577 Node: Symbols180443
   7578 Node: Orphan Sections181190
   7579 Node: Location Counter182354
   7580 Node: Operators186790
   7581 Node: Evaluation187712
   7582 Node: Expression Section189076
   7583 Node: Builtin Functions190565
   7584 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts198532
   7585 Node: Machine Dependent199307
   7586 Node: H8/300200323
   7587 Node: i960201948
   7588 Node: M68HC11/68HC12204049
   7589 Node: ARM205503
   7590 Node: HPPA ELF32213015
   7591 Node: M68K214638
   7592 Node: MMIX215547
   7593 Node: MSP430216712
   7594 Node: PowerPC ELF32217761
   7595 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64220597
   7596 Node: SPU ELF225013
   7597 Node: TI COFF227645
   7598 Node: WIN32228171
   7599 Node: Xtensa247895
   7600 Node: BFD251017
   7601 Node: BFD outline252472
   7602 Node: BFD information loss253758
   7603 Node: Canonical format256275
   7604 Node: Reporting Bugs260632
   7605 Node: Bug Criteria261326
   7606 Node: Bug Reporting262025
   7607 Node: MRI269064
   7608 Node: GNU Free Documentation License273707
   7609 Node: LD Index293424
   7610 
   7611 End Tag Table
   7612